Skip to main content

Full text of "The elements of language"

See other formats


THE  ELEMENTS 
OF    LANGUAGE 


P.  H.  CHAMBERS 


f     BERKELEY 

L^ARY 

UNIvRplTY  OF 
CALlfORNJA 


li 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

Microsoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/elementsoflanguaOOchamrich 


THE  ELEMENTS 
OF    LANGUAGE 


BY 

F.  H.  CHAMBERS,  M.A., 

Headmaster  of  the  Lincoln  Grammar  School. 


LINCOLN  : 

J.  W.  Ruddock  &  Sons,  287  High  Street. 


Printed  for  the  Author  by 

J.  W.  Ruddock  &  Sons,  High  Street, 
Lincoln,  from  whom  any  required 
number  of  copies  may  be  obtained, 

price  1/6  nett    

(postage    extra,    single    copy    3d.). 


PIS'! 
C45 


PREFACE. 

The  following  pages  are  quite  unconventional  and  no 
doubt  differ  considerably  from  the  accepted  type  of 
grammatical  text  book. 

They  put  forward,  nevertheless,  no  new  theory. 
They  deal  with  a  method  rather  than  with  a  theory, 
and  their  aim  is  simple  and  definite — to  meet  certain 
practical  difficulties  which  exist  in  the  teaching  of 
language,  more  especially  of  Latin,  in  certain  kinds  of 
school. 

The  present  writer  has  been  responsible  for  a  school 
of  moderate  size  for  the  last  nine  years.  He  has  been 
subject  during  most  of  that  time  to  the  restrictions 
of  the  Board  of  Education,  and  has  had  to  deal  with 
perhaps  a  larger  proportion  than  usual  of  boys  whose 
school  life  has  been  short — nearer  three  years  than  four, 
and  who  began  it  without  any  previous  preparation 
in  any  language  but  their  own. 

He  has  no  desire  to  dogmatise  about  other  schools 
and  about  other  people's  experience  ;  but,  as  far  as 
his  own  goes,  there  is  no  question  in  his  mind  but  that 
the  problem  of  teaching  Latin,  and  indeed  language 
generally,  in  the  modern  State-controlled  Secondary 
School  is  an  utterly  different  one  from  what  it  was  when 
time  tables  were  roughly  divided  between  Classics 
and  Mathematics,  and  when  school-life  extended  to 
seventeen  or  eighteen. 


IV.  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

There  was  time  then  to  get  through  those  initial 
stages  when  the  forms  were  learnt  by  heart,  and  used 
with  painful  unintelligence.  After  a  period  of  this, 
the  light  dawned  gradually,  and,  given  time,  a  fair 
proportion  of  boys  passed  on  to  a  real  appreciation  of 
language  and  its  uses. 

Under  present  conditions  there  is  no  time.  A  lesson 
a  day  is  all  that  most  schools  can  afford.  The  study 
of  Latin  often  ends  altogether  at  sixteen ;  and  there 
are,  in  point  of  fact,  dozens  of  boys  who  never  get  past 
the  initial  stages  at  all. 

These  boys  never  really  know  what  a  Case  is  or  a 
Mood  ;  their  experience  of  Latin  is  the  useless  and 
barren  one  of  learning  forms  by  heart,  of  putting  certain 
Cases  after  certain  Verbs  because  the  master  or  the 
text  book  tell  them  to,  or  of  going  through  certain 
tricks  with  "  ut  "  and  a  Subjunctive  Mood  ;  their  sole 
stimulus  is  that  of  the  organ-grinder's  monkey,  stripes 
when  they  fail,  sugar  when  they  succeed. 

If  Latin  is  to  form  a  real  part  of  the  machinery  of 
education,  it  seems  to  the  writer  essential  that  the 
early  stages  should  become  something  very  different 
from  what  convention  at  present  makes  them  ;  above 
all  that  they  should  be  logical  instead  of  being  as  at 
present,  an  arsenal  of  unintelligent  rules. 

Commonsense  surely  points  to  this.  In  Mathematics, 
to  use  a  formula  unintelligently  is  a  crime.  Tricks 
with  symbols,  unsupported  by  a  knowledge  of  principles, 
are  not  tolerated  for  a  moment  by  any  teacher  who 
knows  his  business. 

Yet  in  Grammar  the  unintelligent  formula  is  rampant . 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  V. 

There  is  no  book  on  earth  that  dogmatises  as  a  Latin 
Grammar  does. 

To  take  examples  at  random  : 

"  Copulative  Verbs  take  the  same  case  after  them  as 
before  them." 

"  Verbs  which  govern  the  Dative  in  the  Active  are 
only  used  impersonally  in  the  Passive." 

"  Historic  Tenses  in  the  principal  sentence  are  always 
followed  by  Historic  Tenses  in  the  Subordinate  Clause." 

"  The  Imperfect  Subjunctive  in  Conditional  Sentences 
becomes  Imperfect  Subjunctive  when  thrown  into  the 
Oblique  form." 

These  are  formulae  pure  and  simple  ;  each  and  all  of 
them  and  the  dozens  like  them,  which  any  work  on 
syntax  will  reveal,  need  boldly  challenging. 

If  they  are  true,  why  are  they  true  ?  The  writer  asks, 
as  a  schoolmaster,  whose  business  it  is  to  stuff  these  things 
down  young  throats  ?  Are  there  no  reasons  to  be  found 
for  all  these  rules  ?  Are  there  no  first  principles  at  the 
back  of  the  formulas  ?  Has  language  really  developed 
on  lines  of  arbitrary  and  purposeless  disorder  ?  Is  it 
all  that  scholars  can  do  for  us,  to  tell  us  that  these 
things  are  so,  that  they  are  idioms,  that  they  have 
grown  with  use  ?  "  Learning  the  alphabet  is  a  dull 
business,"  they  say,  "  nevertheless  he  who  desires  to 
read  must  do  it." 

If  the  parallel  holds,  Latin  ceases  to  be  a  right  and 
proper  instrument  of  education  for  certain  Schools. 
To  show  that  it  does  not  hold,  at  any  rate  for  a  part  of 
the  field,  is  the  object  the  writer  has  set  before  himself. 

The  following  chapters  are  the  record  of  an  attempt 


VI.  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

to  eliminate  from  the  elements  of  language  rules  and 
formulae  of  any  sort,  and  to  teach  from  first  principles 
only. 

The  chapters  grew  in  the  schoolroom,  coping  with 
the  muddle  that  mechanical  rules  always  have  produced 
and  always  will.  They  are  left  designedly  exactly  as 
they  grew.  Their  value,  if  they  have  any,  lies  in  the 
method  they  exemplify,  and  there  is  only  one  way  to 
make  a  method  clear,  namely,  to  show  it  in  operation. 
For  this  reason  the  writer  apologises  neither  for  collo- 
quialisms nor  for  homely  illustration  nor  for  omissions. 
They  all  had  their  purpose,  and  they  are  left  as  they 
were  used. 

He  has  sometimes  been  asked  whether  the  book  is 
intended  for  the  teacher  or  the  boy.  The  answer  is, 
for  both.  The  boy  is  addressed  as  the  quickest  way  of 
demonstrating  to  the  teacher  the  practicability  or 
otherwise  of  the  method.  Many  teachers  believe 
grammar  from  first  principles  to  be  an  impossible  ideal. 
The  opinion  has  been  expressed  to  the  writer  again  and 
again.  The  only  way  to  meet  the  objection  is  to  put 
the  actual  lesson  on  paper. 

On  the  other  hand,  boys  do  not  read  text  book 
explanations ;  nor  do  teachers  adopt  bodily  other 
teachers'  methods ;  nor  is  most  of  the  matter  dealt  with 
in  this  book  such  as  can  be  taught  otherwise  than  by 
word  of  mouth.  The  practical  use  of  the  book  will 
rather  be  this  ;  there  is  a  logical  argument  running 
through  it,  which  will  need  grasping  and  conserving  ; 
when  the  teacher  has  adapted  it  to  his  own  methods 
and  his  own  pupils,  the  book  will  serve  the  same  purpose 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  VU. 

to  the  grammar  lesson  that  the  geometrical  text  book 
does  to  the  geometry  lesson. 

A  further  reason  for  leaving  the  lessons  as  they  stand 
is  that  they  have  a  certain  natural  order,  which  in  most 
cases  is  not  the  writer's  at  all,  but  the  direct  product  of 
the  boys'  difficulties. 

"  Please,  sir,  what  is  it  for  ?  "  was  the  question  put 
by  a  little  boy  of  twelve,  who  was  struggling  with  a  Case. 

It  was  impossible  to  tell  him  what  it  was  for  without 
previously  familiarising  him  with  the  idea  of  an  in- 
flection. 

To  define  an  inflection,  as  any  experienced  teacher 
knows,  is  of  no  use.  The  boy  has  to  examine,  in  his 
own  language,  inflections  of  his  own  inflecting  till  the 
use  of  the  form  dawns  on  him. 

Even  then  he  has  practically  no  Cases  in  English. 

Yet  for  that  very  reason  he  has  the  forms  that  do  the 
work  Case  once  did — the  equivalents  of  Case  : — Order 
and  Prepositions.  They  are  both  forms  he  uses  in  his 
own  speech  with  perfect  readiness  and  precision.  How, 
except  by  examining  these  under  careful  guidance,  can 
he  form  an  intelligent  idea  of  what  Case  is  ? 

Such  considerations  as  these  often  leave  no  choice 
either  of  the  matter  to  be  treated,  or  of  the  order  of 
its   presentation. 

There  are  similar  questions  which  may  be  asked  with 
equal  reason.  What  is  a  Voice  for  ?  What  is  a  Sub- 
junctive Mood  for  ?  What  is  an  Infinitive  Mood  for  ? 
What  are  the  separate  Subjunctive  Tenses  for  ?  The 
answer  which  the  boy  mostly  gets  is  "  They  are  to 
follow  another  form."     It  is  no  answer  at  all.     After 


VU1.  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

x  comes  y.  What  profit  to  know  it,  if  they  are  both 
unknowns  ? 

The  same  line  of  reasoning  suggests  other  queries. 
Why  is  a  Preposition  enshrined  among  the  parts  of 
speech  when  a  Case  inflection,  which  is  its  parallel, 
is  left  out  in  the  cold  ? 

Why  in  grammar  after  grammar  and  declension  after 
declension  is  the  Nominative  Case  installed  in  the  place 
of  honour  without  a  word  of  reference  to  the  English 
tool  for  doing  the  same  work, — the  principle  of  order. 

Again,  why  is  the  Conjunction  allowed  to  monopolise 
the  whole  idea  of  connection  in  the  way  that  it  does  ? 
Ninety-nine  boys  out  of  a  hundred  never  dream  that 
there  is  any  means  in  language  of  expressing  a  connection 
other  than  a  Conjunction.  The  forms  that  are  under 
their  noses, — proximity,  order,  inflections,  stops, 
prepositions, — are  so  familiar  that  they  are  utterly 
neglected.  The  consequence  is,  the  neglected  forms, 
when  used,  are  used  mechanically.  A  formula  and  not 
commonsense  becomes  the  guide. 

It  is  not  the  boy's  fault,  it  is  the  fault  of  the  con- 
ventional manner  in  which  the  subject  is  presented 
to  his  mind.  Hence  the  prominence  given  in  this  book 
to  connection.  It  is  only  reasonable.  Analysis  is  a 
recognised  form  of  grammatical  exercise :  why  not 
synthesis  ?  Connection  of  various  kinds  is  the  very 
breath  of  life  to  language.  It  is  only  in  the  study  of  the 
work  they  have  to  do  that  some  of  the  connectives, 
e.g.,  the  Subjunctive  Mood,  can  be  properly  under- 
stood. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  IX. 

Teachers  using  this  book  will  probably  find  it  neces- 
sary to  deal  very  slowly  and  thoroughly  with  the  in- 
troductory part,  that  concerned  with  the  recognition 
of  the  fundamental  ideas. 

Until  this  foundation  is  properly  laid,  it  is  useless 
to  go  on. 

It  is  not  sufficient,  moreover,  for  a  boy  to  be  able 
to  recognise  the  Subject,  Verb  and  Object  in  such  a 
sentence  as  "  The  carpenter  made  the  box." 

He  must  also  be  able  to  deal  thoughtfully  with  such 
a  sentence  as  "  It  is  not  a  very  good  light." 

Such  sentences,  as  a  very  short  experience  will  show, 
abound  in  his  own  speech. 

What  is  the  Verb  in  this  sentence  ?  What  is  the 
Subject  ?     What  are  the  non-essentials  ? 

There  may  be  several  answers  to  these  questions. 
If  so,  all  the  better.  To  train  the  boy  to  judge  be- 
tween them  is  the  business  in  hand.  Do  it,  and  he  will 
say  when  he  comes  to  put  it  into  French  : 

Cette  lumiere  n'est  pas  bien  bonne. 

Fail  to  do  it  and  he  will  give  you  the  bald  trans- 
cription : 

II  n'est  pas  une  tres  bonne  lumi&re. 

On  the  other  hand,  once  this  part  of  the  work  is  done, 
the  latter  parts  are  very  quickly  assimilated.  The 
conditions,  in  the  writer's  experience,  are  exactly 
similar  to  those  of  geometrical  teaching.  Lay  the 
foundations  deep  and  firm,  and  progress  in  the  next 
stage  is  rapid  and  sure.  If  they  are  not  so  laid,  to  go 
to  the  next  stage  at  all  is  waste  of  time. 

Some  teachers  may  disagree  with  certain  terms  that 


Xll  THE   ELEMENTS   OF   LANGUAGE 

The  rule  which  one  sentence  suggests,  the  next  one  con- 
tradicts, and  the  boy  is  constantly  forced  back  from 
the  form  to  what  lies  behind  it.  The  teacher  systemati- 
cally using  "  live  "  sentences  will  have  many  questions 
put  to  him  which  are  difficult  to  answer,  but  his  pupils 
will  not  be  able  to  help  but  think. 

Again,  there  may  seem,  towards  the  end  of  the  book, 
overmuch  abstract  thinking. 

Abstractions  no  doubt,  are  hard  for  boys  ;  but  in 
some  cases,  in  that  of  the  Subjunctive,  for  example,  the 
alternative  to  risking  a  more  or  less  abstract  explanation 
is  the  mischievous  and  dangerous  course  of  letting  the 
boy  use  the  Mood  without  knowing  what  it  means. 

The  writer's  experience  goes  to  show  that  the  difficulty, 
so  far  as  these  lessons  go,  is  by  no  means  formidable. 
Theory,  as  always,  must  be  administered  in  not  too 
large  doses,  and  followed  by  an  immediate  instalment  of 
practice  ;  for  example,  the  theory  of  the  Subjunctive 
would  be  followed  by  the  analysis  of  the  Subjunctives 
in  a  page  or  two  of  familiar  Latin.  Given,  however, 
these  and  such  other  precautions  as  will  suggest  them- 
selves to  an  experienced  teacher,  no  confusion  need  be 
apprehended — none  at  least  in  any  way  comparable 
with  what  is  inevitable,  if  theory  is  left  untouched  and 
practice  unintelligent. 

Lastly.  The  writer  desires  to  acknowledge  his  in- 
debtedness to  Heyse's  "Deutsche  Grammatik,"  for  the 
main  part  of  the  chapter  on  the  developments  of  the 
cases ;  and  to  his  friends  and  colleagues  in  his  own 
school  for  invaluable  help  and  criticism. 

F.  H.  C. 


CONTENTS. 


PAGE 


CHAPTER    I.  i7 

The  Sentence  and  its  essential  components.  Nouns. 
Verbs.  Subjects.  Objects. 

The  Substitution  of  the  Pronoun  for  the  Noun  - 

Elementary  Classification  of  Verbs. 

The  Servant  Words  of  the  Sentence.  The  Ad- 
jective.    The  Adverb. 

Replacing  Phrases  and  Sentences. 

The  Connectives  of  the  Sentence.  Prepositions. 
Conjunctions. 

CHAPTER    II.  41 

Inflection,     and     its     purpose.     The     alternative 

method  of  expression. 
Elementary   Case   Inflections   in   Latin   and   their 

use.     The     English    and     French    alternatives. 

Order  and  Prepositions. 
Elementary  Tense   Inflections  in  Latin.     English 

and  French  parallel  forms. 
The   Mood    Inflections.     The   Infinitive "  and   Par- 
ticipial forms  ;    their  meaning  and  the  principles 

which  govern  their  use. 
The  Active  and  Passive  Voice.     The  construction 

of  the  forms  they  employ. 

CHAPTER    III.  85 

Adjectives  and  Adverbs.  The  Servant  words. 
The  necessity  of  proper  attachment.  The 
necessity  of  proper  subordination.  The  means 
used  to  secure  these  two  ends  in  Latin,  French 


CHAPTER    IV.  92 

The  principles  of  Classification.     Their  application 

to  the  various  parts  of  speech,  more  especially 

to    Pronouns.     Examination    of   the    Reflexive, 

the  Demonstrative,  the  Relative  Pronouns,  etc. 

xiii. 


XIV.  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

CHAPTER   V.  no 

Agreement ;  in  connection  with  the  adjective  ;  in 
cases  of  apposition  ;  in  the  Subject  Verb  com- 
bination. 

The  government  of  nouns,  wrongly  so  called. 

CHAPTER   VI.  n8 

Parsing.  What  it  is.  What  it  is  not.  Where 
its  difficulties  lie. 

CHAPTER    VII.  124 

Analysis.  First  approximation,  i.e.  the  formal 
identification  of  the  parts  of  speech,  of  little 
practical  value.  Second  approximation  ;  the 
distinction  between  the  essentials  and  the 
luxuries  of  a  sentence.  Recognition  of  the  real 
essentials.  The  necessity  of  their  predominance. 
Precautions  against  the  encroachment  of  the 
subordinate  elements.  The  mending  of  faulty 
sentences,  and  the  application  of  the  principles 
to  composition  generally. 

Suggestions  for  more  complex  analysis. 

Third  approximation  ;  the  relative  values  of 
different  words  to  the  central  idea,  as  shown 
in  English  by  order. 

CHAPTER   VIII.  152 

Synthesis :  as  important  as  analysis.  Basis  of 
connection  between  words  or  sentences  the 
already  existing  connections  between  the  things 
or  ideas  they  represent.  Examination  of  this 
connection  for  the  case  of  two  sentences.  In- 
dependent and  dependent  relationships.  The 
tools  for  their  expression  The  Conjunctions. 
Other  connections  examined.  Subject-Verb, 
Adjective-Noun,  etc.  The  tools  for  their  ex- 
pression.    Case.     Order.     Prepositions. 

CHAPTER    IX.  159 

The  connection  of  replacing  sentences.  The  Ad- 
verb sentence.  Various  forms  of  Adjective 
sentence.  The  Noun  sentence.  The  distinc- 
tion between  the  independent  and  the  depen- 


CONTENTS.  XV. 

PAGE 
dent  connections.  The  expression  of  a  depen- 
dent connection  and  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive 
mood  involved.  The  expression  of  an  indepen- 
dent connection.  The  Mood  used  in  indepen- 
dent connection.  The  analysis  of  compound 
relative  combinations  and  the  principles  of  their 
connection. 

CHAPTER    X.  172 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  and  its  definition.  In  what 
sense  does  it  possess  Tenses  ?  General  Analysis 
of  Tense.  Grouping  of  the  Tense  Forms.  The 
relationships  of  the  Groups.  The  relations  of 
the  Subjunctive  Tenses  with  the  Future  In- 
dicatives— and  with  the  Infinitives.  The 
Sequence  of  Tenses. 

CHAPTER    XL  187 

A  further  analysis  of  the  steps  of  connection  ; 
and  of  the  exact  function  of  the  different 
connectives,  proximity,  case,  order,  preposi- 
tions, and  more  especially  of  the  co-ordinate  and 
subordinate  conjunctions.  (This  may  be  deferred 
till  the  second  reading  of  the  subject,  if  desired). 

CHAPTER    XII.  199 

Practical  applications  of  the  foregoing  principles. 

CHAPTER    XIII.  207 

A  general  analysis  of  the  ideas  expressed  by  Case. 

CHAPTER    XIV.  215 

Appendix.  Some  definitions.  Notes  on  Oratio 
Obliqua. 


CHAPTER    I. 

THE    FUNDAMENTAL    IDEAS. 

Words  are   tools — tools   of   expression. 
Tools  are  made  to  be  used — not  to  be  hung  up  in 
shining  rows  and  classified. 

If  you  want  to  be  a  carpenter  you  do  not  begin 
by  wandering  round  the  workshop  naming  every  tool, 
you  can  see,  large  and  small. 

On  the  contrary,  you  are  given  some  simple  tool, 
you  watch  it  being  used,  you  use  it  yourself,  first  on 
simple  and  then  on  more  difficult  work.  By  using  it 
you  soon  discover  the  laws  of  the  tool,  what  it  is  for, 
what  it  will  do,  what  it  will  not  do.  Then  you  go  on 
to  a  second,  and  so  on. 

The  name  of  the  tool  does  not  matter  much.  Of 
course  it  has  a  name,  but  it  is  knowledge  of  the  thing, 
not  of  its  name,  that  matters. 

Similarly  with  word  tools,  not  the  names  but  the 
work  they  do,  and  the  way  they  do  it  are  the  important 
things. 

To  gain  this  knowledge  you  must  watch  the  words 
being  used.     Where  ? 

In  your  own  speech  and  in  that  of  your  friends. 

You  start  with  this  great  advantage  over  the  budding 
carpenter,  that  you  can  and  do  use  a  very  large  number 
of  these  tools  correctly  and  effectively. 

You  can  express  by  words  most  things  that  you  want 
to  say,  and  you  generally  use  the  words  perfectly  rightly. 

b  ;  -17 


Sentence 


l8  THE   ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

You  do  it,  however,  not  because  you  understand  the 
tools  that  you  are  using,  or  anything  about  them,  but 
because  of  long  habit. 

You  have  been  expressing  thoughts  by  words,  ever 
since  you  could  speak,  never  troubling  about  how  it 
was  done,  but  still  doing  it  correctly. 

You  have  now  to  look  more  closely  at  the  words,  the 
tools  you  have  been  unconsciously  using. 

You  have  to  watch  them  at  work,  and  use  them  again 
yourself  (intelligently  this  time),  till  you  discover  the 
laws  which  govern  them. 


§1         To  begin  with   you   do  not  talk  in  single  words. 

IhA  _        Anything    you  say  with  any  sense  in  it  is  practically 
always  made  of  two  or  more  words. 

For  example,  if  I  say  Kitten,  it  is  not  exactly 
nonsense  but  it  is  not  sense.  If  I  say  The  kitten 
furred  it  is  sense. 

If  you  do  not  believe  it,  try  for  some  single  word 
conversation  yourselves. 

Here  is  an  example  : 

A.  Go. 

B.  What  ? 

A.  Go. 

B.  Go? 

A.  Yes. 

B.  Shan't. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  19 

How  long  can  you  keep  this  up  ?  It  gets  a  little 
tiring,  doesn't  it  ?  Does  it  make  sense  ?  Yes.  Only 
on  one  condition  though — That  you  supply  out  of  your 
own  head  a  lot  of  words  which  are  not  spoken.  That  is 
wha,t  makes  it  tiring.  The  sentences  are  not  really 
one-word  sentences  at  all.  There  are  some  more  words 
there,  which  you  mean  and  don't  say. 

It  does  not  always  follow  that  every  time  two  or  three 
words  are  put  together  it  is  sense.  I  might  say  for 
example  Kitten  ran  tail,   which  is  not  sense. 

A  collection  of  sense-making  words  is  called  a 
sentence.  You  use  hundreds  of  such  sentences 
daily. 


The  next  thing  you  have  to  do  is  to  examine  some     §2 
sentences.      As  those  you  use  have  sometimes   (though  Nouns 
you   probably    do    not    know   it)    rather    complicated  verbs 
parts    to    them,    it     will    be    better    to    begin    with 
some  simple  ones  ;   for  example,  say  something  simple 
about  a  cat. 

"  The  cat  scratched  the  baby." 

Look  at  this  sentence.  It  is  made  of  words  Cat 
Scratched.  Baby.  These  are  not  all  alike.  Which 
are  alike  ?     Cat.     Baby. 

Draw  a  picture  of  them  both. 

What  are  they  ?  Names, — the  name  of  an  animal— 
the  name  of  a  person. 


20  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Scratched.  Draw  a  picture  of  "  scratched."  You 
cannot.  It  does  not  describe  a  thing,  but  an  action. 
Scratched  is  the  word  that  tells  you  what  was 
happening. 

Say  something  about  a  lion. 

"The  lion  ate  the  donkey." 

Which  of  these  words  are  alike  ?  Lion  and  donkey. 
They  are  like  cat  and  baby  in  the  previous  sentence, 
Names, — the  names  of  two  animals. 

Ate  again  is  like  scratched—it  tells  you  what 
was  happening. 

Say  something  about  the  sun. 

"The  sun  shone," 

Sun  is  like  cat,  baby,  lion,  donkey,  a  name,  the 
name  of   a   thing. 

Shone  tells  you  what  was  happening. 

Say  something  about  your  brother. 
My  brother  is  stupid. 

Brother  is  like  cat,  baby,  lion,  donkey,  a  Name, 
the  name  of  a  person. 

Is  stupid  tells  you  what  is  happening. 

In  these  sentences,  therefore,  we  get  two  main  sets 
of  words,  first  Names,  names  of  persons — like  brother, 
or  of  things— like  sun,  or  of  animals— like  cat,  donkey, 
These  words  are  called  NOUNS:  the  names  of  any- 
thing or  anybody. 

The  other  sort  is  the  kind  that  tells  you  what  is 
happening.  Scratching,  eating,  shining,  being  stupid. 
Such  words  are  called  YERBS 

Now  Verbs  are  very  important  words — kings  of  the 
sentence  in  fact.     You  must  learn  to  recognise  them. 

No  sentence  can  stand  up  without  a  Verb  ;  it  is  like 
a  boy  without  a  backbone. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  21 

Try.     Willy  —  the  lamppost. 

What  does  that  mean  ?     Put  a  verb  in,  and  another. 

Try  again.     Father  —  boots. 

What  does  this  mean  ?     Put  a  verb  in. 

In  the  same  way  make  sense  of  :— 

The  tiger  —  the  elephant. 

The  ship  —  the  flag. 

The  horse  —  the  corn. 

Make  a  list  of  the  words  you  have  inserted  in  all 

these  sentences. 

Rewrite  the  sentences,  putting  in  other  similar  words. 

Again,  make  sense  of  : 

The  tiger  - 

The  ship  -        - 

The  horse         -        - 

by  putting  something  in. 

Make  a  list  of  the  words  you  put  in. 

Now  examine  your  lists.     You  will   hnd  the  words 

in  them  are  all  like  Scratched,  ate,  was  stupid,  the  words 

we  had  above. 

All  these  words  are  verbs. 

What  do  they  tell  you  ?     What  is  happening. 

If  you  look  at  them  closely  you  see  two  sorts  of 

things  and  only  two  happen.  Verbs 

i.    People  do  things. 

-».,,.  1.   Actions 

2.     People  are  things.  2.  States 

We  might  say,  therefore,  Verbs  describe  actions  or 

states. 

There  are  several  parts  to  them  sometimes. 
The  cat  has  been  scratching  the  baby. 
My  brother  was  stupid. 


describe 


22  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  whole  collection  constitutes  the  Verb. 

We  see  then  that  the  Verb  is  that  part  of  the  sentence 
which  tells  you  what  is  happening.  It  is  indispensable. 
There  is  no  sense  in  a  sentence  without  it. 


§3        Indispensable  as  the  Verb  is,  however,  there  is  another 

The        thing  in  the  sentence  which  is  equally  indispensable. 

Subject   Supposing  I  say  Shone,  that  tells  something  about  the 

action,  but  it  does  not  tell  you — What  ?    Was  it  the 

sun  that  shone, — or  the  kettle — or  your  boots  ?     You 

do  not  really  know  about  the  action  until  you  know 

who  did  it. 

Supposing  I  say  : 

Drowned  the  cat, 
there  is  something  missing  besides  pussy.     What  is  it  ? 
Information  about  the  murderer. 
Again,  supposing  I  say  : 

Was  stupid, 
there  is  something  missing.     What  is  it  ?     Information 
about  who  was  stupid. 

If  the  sentence,  therefore,  is  to  tell  us  anything 
properly,  besides  having  a  verb  to  tell  us  about  an 
action,  we  must  also  have  a  word  to  tell  us  who  did  it  ; 
besides  having  a  word  to  tell  us  about  a  state,  we  must 
also  have  a  word  to  tell  us  who  or  what  was  in  it.  The 
word  or  words  that  do  this  work  are  called  the  Subject 
words,  or  for  shortness  the  Subject.  (The  word  Subject 
means  "  subject  of  the  sentence,"  i.e.,  the  person  or 
the  thing  the  sentence  is  about). 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  23 

We  have  now  had  three  great  ideas  :  Nouns,  which  Recapitu- 
are  a  particular  sort  of  word  ;  Verbs,  which  are  another  jjJJJJJJlaJf 
sort ;    Subjects,  which  are  a  part  of  the  sentence. 

It  is  essential  before  you  go  further  that  you  should 
be  able  to  recognise  these  without  a  mistake.  Practise 
them  therefore  one  at  a  time,  thus  : — 


Nouns.     Take  a  page  of  your  reading  book  ;    note     Ex.  i. 
every  noun  you  see.     Write  them  in  a  list.  Nouns 


Take  any  verb  you  like  ;  attach  one  or  sometimes 
two  nouns  to  it  to  make  sense.  Repeat  this  half-a- 
dozen  times  with  new  verbs  and  new  nouns. 

You  may  find  some  doubtful  words  in  the  reading 
book ;  you  will  not  be  quite  sure  if  they  are  nouns  or 
not.  Ask  yourself  whether  they  are  the  names  of  any- 
thing or  anybody.  If  you  cannot  settle  it  yourself, 
ask  somebody  who  knows.  You  will  not  find  Nouns 
on  the  whole  at  all  hard  to  recognise. 


Verbs.  Collect  and  write  out  a  number  of  short 
sentences  of  three  or  four  words.  Do  not  invent  them 
for  the  purpose — you  will  probably  invent  them  all 
alike  if  you  do — but  catch  them  alive,  i.e.,  take  sen- 
tences that  you  actually  say  to  other  people,  or  that 
other  people  say  to  you.  For  example,  "  I  had  not  got 
time,"  "  My  bicycle  broke."  Mind  and  take  little 
ones. 


24  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

In  these  sentences,  first  of  all  notice  all  the  verbs  : 
convince  yourself  that  you  use  one  in  every  sentence. 
Then  write  them  all  down  in  a  column. 

What  does  a  verb  tell  you  ?       What  happens. 

What  does  happen  ?  Actions  or  states. 

Go  to  each  verb  separately  and  ask  yourself  whether 
it  is  describing  an  action  or  a  state,  i.e.,  is  somebody 
doing  something  or  is  somebody  being  something  ? 
Write  action  or  state  by  the  side  of  the  word  accordingly 


Next    write    half-a-dozen    sentences    about    a    ship. 
Pick  out  the  verbs  you  use.    Put  action  or  state  at  the 
side  of  them  as  before. 
Ex.  4.         Repeat  this  half-a-dozen  times,  with  any  other  noun 
Terbs      yon  like. 

Do  not  be  afraid  to  reckon  as  the  verb  all  the  words 
that  tell  you  about  the  action  or  the  state.  For 
example  : 

I  am  going  to  see  him  to-morrow, 
"  am  going  to  see  "  is  the  verb. 

He  looked  ill, 
"  looked  ill,"  not  "  looked  "  is  the  verb. 

You  will  find  some  words  that  seem  to  you  doubtful. 
Ought  they  to  be  state  verbs  or  action  verbs  ?  If  you 
cannot  settle  it  for  yourself,  leave  them  and  ask  some- 
body who  knows. 


E%.  5      Subjects.    Write  in  a  column  the  following  sentences 
Subject  1.     Jones  lent  him  his  bicycle. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


25 


2.  I  have  been  very  ill. 

3.  The  house  was  burnt  down. 

4.  My  uncle  gave  me  sixpence. 

5.  He  will  be  fourteen  next  week. 

6.  That  will  hurt  you. 

7.  Your  exercise  is  nonsense. 

8.  I  have  not  a  penny. 

9.  The  dentist  pulled  out  six  teeth. 
10.     This  is  not  yours. 

Examine  the  verb  in  each  of  these  sentences.  Make 
up  your  mind  whether  it  is  an  action  verb  or  a  state 
verb. 

Write  "  action  "  or  "  state  "  accordingly  in  a  parallel 
column  by  the  side  of  the  sentence. 

Then  go  to  each  sentence  with  one  or  the  other  of 
the  following  questions  : — 

1.  Is  it  an  action  verb  ?     If  so,  somebody  did 
the  action.     Who  ? 

2.  Is  it  a  state  verb  ?     If  so  somebody  was  in 
the  state.     Who  ? 

The  answer  gives  you  the  Subject.  Write  it  in  another 
parallel  column  opposite  the  sentence. 


Again,  make  a  collection  of  a  dozen  live  sentences  Ex^  6 

as  before.     Do  the  same  for  each  sentence  in  the  col-  subject 

lection. 

Note. — You  will  do  well  to  keep  the  various  collections  of  live 
sentences  you  make.  Flowers  are  best  studied  growing,  not  in  a 
picture  book ;  and  words  are  best  studied  in  their  natural  place, 
namely,  in  your  own  speech  and  that  of  those  around  you. 
Such  collections  will  be  needed  for  almost  every  form  or  word 
you  study. 


26  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Never  allow  in  them  anything  you  do  not  actually  hear  ;  also 
reject,  at  any  rate  at  first,  any  sentences  that  are  not  fairly 
straightforward.  They  might  cause  you  difficulty.  Afterwards 
it  will  not  matter.     Questions  especially  are  puzzling. 

Such  collections  are  most  useful  when  they  are  roughly  classi- 
fied, e.g., 

A  collection  of  action  sentences, 

A  collection  of  state  sentences, 

A  collection  of  double  sentences,  and  so  on. 

You  will  perhaps  find  among  the  sentences  you  have 
just  treated,  some  in  which  the  Subjects  are  not  easy 
to  see  at  first.     For  example  : 

"  Let  us  go  home." 

What  is  the  verb  ?  "let  us  go." 

What  sort  ?  Action. 

Who  was  to  do  the  going  ?        We. 

u  We  "  therefore  is  the  subject  of  "  let  us  go." 

Again, 

Go  away. 

What  is  the  verb  ?        Go.     Action  verb  as  before. 

Who  was  to  do  it  ?       You. 

"  You  "  is  the  Subject. 


§4         Again,  examine  the  column  of  Subjects  of  all  the 
Pronouns    sentences  you  have  treated  thus. 

What  sort  of  words  are  they  ?     Mostly  nouns. 
Any  others  ?     Probably. 

Collect  them.     "  I,"  "  he,"  "  we,"  "  that,"  "  this," 
or  other  words  like  them. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  2J 

What  are  these  words  ?  Words  which  seem  to  come 
in  and  occupy  the  noun's  place.  They  clearly  mean 
the  same  as  the  nouns. 

What  does  "  he  "  mean  ?         "  Jones." 

What  is  "  Jones  "  ?  Noun. 

That  is  to  say  "  he  "  means  the  same  as  a  certain 
noun. 

Such  words  are  called  Pronouns.  They  are  words 
which  do  exactly  the  same  work  as  nouns  and  replace 
them. 

Why  do  they  replace  them  ?  Why  cannot  nouns  do 
their  own  work  ?  You  will  see  the  answer  if  you  try 
to  say  this  without  Pronouns  : 

He  gave  me  sixpence,  because  he  was  so  pleased 
with  me,  and  told  me  not  to  spend  it  all  at  once. 


We  have  spoken  of  Verb  and  Subject.     Is  the  sentence     §5 
now  complete,  if  we  know  what  is  done  and  who  did  it  ?    The  Objec 
Examine  some  sentences. 

"The  sun  shines." 
Is  this  complete  ?     Yes. 
"The  dog  barks." 
Is  this  ?     Yes. 
"  My  brother  is  stupid." 
Is  this  ?     Yes. 

"The  boy  broke ." 

Is  this  ?     If  not,  what  do  we  want  to  know  ? 


28  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Clearly,  to  whom  or  to  what  the  action  is  done.     The 
word  that  tells  us  this  is  called  the  Object. 


§6         Examine  the  following  Verbs  : 
Ex.  6.  Struck.   Shines.   Fell  down.    Weave.   Was  ill. 

Smiled.    Grew  fat.    Built.    Overflows.    Broke. 
Seems  long.    Annoy.    Wrote.    Brushed.    Was 
in  a  hurry.    Flows.    Sings, — and  as   many 
more  as  you  like  to  put  in. 
Put  a  Subject  to  them  and  see  if  the  sentence  is 
complete. 

If  not,  complete  it  as  simply  as  possible. 
Make  a  list  of  the  words  you  completed  it  with. 
What  were  they  ?     Nouns  and  pronouns. 
Make  a  list  of  the  verbs  which  needed  completion. 
Split  this  list  again  into  two  groups,  action  verbs 
or  state  verbs  as  the  case  may  be. 

Make  a  list  of  the  verbs  which  did  not  need  com- 
pletion. Label  these  action  or  state  verbs  as  the  case 
may  be. 

You  will  find  you  will  have  three  lists  : 

i.     Action  verbs  which  need  no  completion. 

2.  State  verbs  which  need  no  completion. 

3.  Action  verbs  which  need  completion. 
Transitive       It  is,  then,   a  particular  sort  of  action  verb  which 
transitive    neec*s  completing,  and  the  completion  which  it  needs 
▼erbs         is  information  about  the  receiver  of  the  action. 

The  word  or  words  which  supply  that  information 
are  called  the  Object  words  of  the  action,  or  more  shortly, 
the  Object. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  20, 

The  other  action  verbs,  on  the  other  hand  need  no 
receiver. 

The  two  sets  of  action  verbs  might  be  called  action 
passing  verbs  and  non-action  passing  verbs,  according 
as  they  pass  their  action  on  to  a  receiver  or  not. 

They  are  usually  called  Transitive  and  Intransitive 
verbs,  which  are  Latin  names  meaning  "  the  action 
passes,"  "  the  action  does  not  pass." 


Take  twenty  live   sentences.     Pick  out   the   action     Em.  7. 
sentences. 

Arrange  the  action  sentences  in  two  groups,  action 
passing  sentences,  non-action  passing  sentences. 

Notice  carefully :  an  Object  is  not  needed  in  all 
sentences. 

State  verbs  do  not  describe  an  action  at  all,  so  of 
course  they  have  no  receiver  of  it. 

Some  action  verbs  do  not  need  a  receiver,  but,  when 
the  action  does  imply  a  receiver,  then  the  Object  is 
indispensable.  It  is*  like  the  Verb  and  the  Subject  in 
this. 


Again,  when  actions  pass,  as  has  just  been  explained,     §7 
they  pass  to  somebody  or  something. 

Often,  however,  they  pass  to  more  than  one  some- 
body or  something. 

"I  gave  the  lion  the  baby." 


30  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  Two  people  are  interested  in  this  action — the  lion 

Object    anc*  ^e  DaDv-     It  concerns  them  both.     They  are  both 
Objects. 

It  does  not  concern  them,  however,  in  the  same  way. 
It  makes  a  difference  whether  I  gave  the  lion  the  baby, 
or  I  gave  the  baby  the  lion. 

Draw  a  picture  of  the  first  incident. 
What  have  I  got  in  my  hand  ?    The  baby. 
Draw  a  picture  of  the  second. 
What  have  I  got  in  my  hand  ?    The  lion,  (stuffed 
presumably) . 

What  gets  given  the  first  time  ? 
What  gets  given  the  second  time  ? 
Each  time  the  action,  as  it  were,  hits  one  of  the 
Objects  first,  then  glances  off  and  hits  the  other. 

We  can  very  well  distinguish  these  Objects  by  calling 
them  Object  No.  1  and  Object  No.  2.  They  are  often 
called  the  Direct  Object  and  the  Indirect  Object. 

It  does  not  follow  that  every  time  you  have  a  pair  of 
Objects,  they  are  No.  i  and  No.  2. 
You  might  have  two  No.  i  Objects. 

"I  saw  my  brother  and  his  wife," 
or  again,  No.  i  Objects  and  No.  2  Objects  mixed. 
"  I  offered  the  lion  the  baby  and  some  biscuits.' ' 


Summary        To  summarise — for  the  complete  sense  of  every  sen- 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  31 

tence  we  must  know  about  the  action  or  the  state, 
(the  Verb  tells  us  this)  : 

We  must  know  who  does  it  or  is  in  it,  (the  Subject 
tells  us  this)  : 

Sometimes,  though  not  always,  we  must  know  to 
whom  actions  are  done  (the  Objects  tell  us  this). 


The  Subject,  Verb  and  Objects  are  the  kings  of  the     §8 
sentence.     They  contain  its  main  meaning  and  do  its  The 
real  work.  ™ 

Now  these  kings,   like  other  kings,  have  servants. 

A  servant's  business  is  always  to  do  something  for 
his  master  which  his  master  does  not  do  for  himself. 

The  Verb  has  such  a  servant — the  ADVERB. 

It  is  the  Adverb's  business,  not  to  describe  the  main  The 
action   itself,    (which  is  the   verb's   business),   but  to Adverb 
describe  something  about  the  action  which  the  verb 
does  not — how  or  when  or  where  or  why  it  took  place. 
Here  are  some  at  work. 

i.     I  saw  him  yesterday. 

2.  The  sun  shines  brightly. 

3.  My  father  is  coming  soon. 

4.  Don't  speak  so  loud. 


The  Subjects  and  Objects,  which  are  mainly  Nouns,  The 
have  also  such  a  servant— the  ADJECTIVE.  Adjective 


32  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The    Adjective's    business    is,    not    to    describe    the 
things  themselves,   (that  is  the  Noun's  business),  but 
to  tell  us  something  about  them  which  the  Noun  itself 
does  not  tell  us.     Here  are  some  at  work, 
i.     Make  up  a  good  fire. 

2.  He  had  a  white  rose  in  his  buttonhole. 

3.  I  like  a  low  chair. 

4.  He  would  make  an  excellent  policeman. 
Note  that  the  Adverb,  which  is  mainly  the  servant 

of  the  Verb,  can  also  do  odd  jobs  for  an  Adjective  or 
another  Adverb.     Here  are  some  Adverbs  at  such  work. 

1.  He  is  not  a  very  nice  boy. 

2.  You  have  come  too  soon. 

3.  His  face  is  quite  black. 

We  have  thus  as  the  elements  of  a  full  sentence  : 

1.  Subjects,  Verbs,  and  Objects. 

2.  Their  servants. 

Now  it  is  of  the  utnnst  importance  that  you  should 
be  able  to  recognise  all  these  various  elements  with 
certainty  and  precision. 

Until  you  are  able  to  do  this  you  have  no  business 
to  go  further,  for  you  will  understand  nothing. 

Nothing  but  practice  will  give  you  the  requisite  power. 

Practice  will  always  take  the  same  form,  an  examina- 
tion of  your  own  speech. 

To  recognise  Objects,  take  your  various  sets  of  live 
sentences.  Choose  one.  Is  there  any  set  will  serve 
your  purpose  better  than  another  ? 

There  are  at  least  two  sets  which  cannot  contain 
Objects.     Which  are  they  ? 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  33 

i.     Having  found  your  set  of  action  passing  sentences,  Ex.  8. 
which  is  the  one  you  need,  go  through  it,  labelling  the  objects 
Objects.     Distinguish  No.  i  Object  from  No.  2. 

Make  a  list  of  the  No.   1  Objects  and  examine  it. 

You  will  find  the  same  mixture  of  Nouns  and  Pronouns 
that  you  found  among  the  Subjects. 

Do  the  same  for  Object  No.  2. 


2.     Label  the  Objects  in  any  set  of  live  sentences  Ex 
chosen  at  random.  Objects 

It  will  keep  you  straight  if  you  label  the  Verbs  before 
you  touch  the  Objects,  otherwise  you  may  label  a  word 
as  Object  in  a  state  sentence,  which  is  nonsense. 

As  you  improve,  label  the  Objects  without  this  pre- 
caution. 

Repeat  this  exercise  till  you  are  perfect. 


3.     Practise  putting  some  Objects  in.  %x   IO 

Take  any  Verb  you  please.     Add  a  Subject,  then  an  objects 
Object,  if  it  admits  one,  No.  1  or  No.  2,  or  both. 

Of  course  make  sense  all  the  time. 

Be  careful  not  to  confuse  Objects  with  Adverbs. 

Because  a  word  follows  a  verb  it  is  not  therefore  an 
Object. 

Don't  call  brightly  an  Object  in   "  The  sun  shines 
brightly." 

The  form  of  question  to  put  to  yourself  is  always  : 
What  is  the  verb  ?     Shines. 

Then,  to  whom  is  the  shining  done  ?     The  answer 
will  give  you  the  Object  when  there  is  one. 
C 


34  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Ex.  ii.      To  recognise  Adjectives  and  Adverbs. 

Adjectives  por  Adjectives  search  any  set  of  live  sentences  for 
words  that  tell  you  something  about  a  Noun.  Make  a 
list  of  the  words  when  you  have  found  them.  Note 
that  such  words  generally  stand  immediately  before  the 
Noun  and  are  therefore  very  easily  recognised. 


Ex.  12.  For  Adverbs,  search  similarly  for  words  which  tell 

Adverbs      y0U  something  about  the  Verb,  i.e.,  about  the  action  or 

the  state.    Collect  them  in  a  list  as  before.    The  lists 

will  be  useful  later. 


Ex.  13.  Again,  search  your  sets  of  sentences  for  words  telling 

Adverbs      vou  something  about  Adjectives  or  other  Adverbs. 

In  these  searches,  you  may  come  across  sets  of  words 
doing  the  work  you  are  concerned  with,  as  well  as  single 
words,  e.g., 

"  I  spent  an  hour  in  the  garden." 
If  you  understand  what  the  set  is  doing,  label  it 
accordingly.     If  not,  let  it  alone  till  you  have  got  to  the 
end  of  the  next  chapter  and  go  back  and  label  it  then. 


§9         We  have  spoken  of  Sentences.    They  are  made  of 
Subjects,  Verbs  and  Objects,  with  their  servants. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  35 

What    have    Subjects    and    Objects    mainly    been  ? 

Nouns  and  Pronouns. 

They  can  be,  however,   not  only  single  words,  but  Replacing 
«     f,  i         *  Phrases 

collections  of  words,  e.g.,  and 

What  he  said  surprised  me.  Sentences 

I  like  to  go  out  for  a  walk. 

Find  in  the  usual  way  the  Subjects  and  Objects  of 

these  sentences.     You  will  see  they  are  collections  of 

words.     Servants  also  can  be  collections  of  words. 

"  I  shall  come  to  see  you,  when  I  am  in  town." 

These  collections  of  words  are  not  all  alike. 

Compare 

"  I  shall  come  to  see  you,  when  I  am  in  town." 

"  I  shall  come  to  see  you  at  10  o'clock." 

"  I  shall  come  to  see  you  soon." 

"  when  I  am  in  town."  J  are  all  doing  the  same  work, 

"  at  10  o'clock."  viz.  :     assisting     "  shall 

"  soon."  J     come   to    see."      Hence 

)     they  are  all  Adverbs. 

"  Soon  "  is  a  single  word  Adverb, 

"At  10  o'clock  "  is  what  is  called  an  Adverb  phrase, 

that  is  to  say  a  collection  of  words  without  a  Verb  which 

does  duty  for  an  Adverb. 

"  When  I  am  in  town  "  is  an  Adverb  sentence. 

Similarly,  a  collection  of  words  without  a  Verb,  which 

does  duty  for  an  Adjective,  would  be  an  Adjective  phrase. 

Make  some. 

Can  you  have  Noun  phrases  ? 

A  sentence,   as  you  saw  above,   can  stand   for  an 

Adverb.     Can  it  stand  for  an  Adjective. 

Can  it  stand  for  a  Noun  ? 


36  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Sentences  or  phrases  standing  for  different  parts  of 
speech  will  naturally  have  just  the  same  importance 
or  otherwise  as  the  words  they  replace. 

For  example,  a  sentence  standing  for  the  Subject 
would  be  one  of  the  kings  of  the  full  sentence. 

A  sentence  standing  for  an  Adverb  would  be  one  of 
the  servants  of  the  full  sentence. 

You  must  now,  in  exactly  the  same  way  as  before, 
learn  to  recognise  these  replacing  sentences  and  phrases. 
Your  own  speech,  as  before,  will  be  the  place  to 
search  for  them.  You  will  find  plenty  of  replacing 
phrases  in  it. 

"  I  am  going  into  the  garden." 
"  It  looks  like  the  beginning  of  winter." 
"  I  was  told  so  by  a  man  in  the  train." 
You  will  not  find  so  many  replacing  sentences.     You 
do  not  use  these  so  freely. 

To  study  replacing  sentences,  therefore,  catch  some 

fairly  long  live  sentences,     e.g. 

Ex.  14.  »  1  did  not  know  what  he  had  done,  till  he  told  me." 

Phrases,          Label  every  replacing  sentence  or  phrase  as  you  come 

to  it,  either  Noun,  Adjective  or  Adverb  according  to 

its  work. 

Catch  and  go  through  one  set  of  live  sentences  after 
another  till  you  are  as  much  at  home  with  replacing 
sentences  or  phrases  as  you  are  with  the  single  words 
which  they  represent. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  37 

It  is  further  highly  necessary  that  you  should  get  a     §10 

sharp  sense  of  the  difference  which  exists  between  the  Essentials 

work  of  the  kings  of  the  sentence  and  that  of  their  2nd  N°n~ 
&  Essentials 

servants.  of  the 

The    Subject,    Verb   and   Object    are    indispensable. Sentence 
The  sentence  can  say  nothing  without  them. 

The  servants  add  fullness  to  the  sentence  but  they 
are  luxuries. 

It  is  easy  enough  to  see  the  difference  between  the 
kings  and  their  servants  when  they  are  single  words  ; 
it  is  not  always  so  easy  when  replacing  sentences  come 
in. 

It  is  a  difference  you  ought  to  be  able  to  tell  at  a 
glance.  To  gain  this  power  of  quick  distinction,  write 
a  considerable  number  of  your  live  sentences,  especially 
the  longer  ones,  with  the  servant  parts  in  red  ink. 

Do  not  confuse  the  sentences  that  replace  Subjects  Ex.  15. 
or  Objects  with  those  that  replace  Adjectives  or  Adverbs.  Replacing 
Subject  or  Object  replacing  sentences  are  not  servants,  Sentence 
but  kings.     Write  them  in  black,  like  the  verb. 

1.  I  am  going  home  to-morrow. 

2.  I  lost  the  knife  you  gave  me  (Adj.  sentence). 

3.  We  buried  the  puppy  in  the  garden.    (Adv. 

phrase). 
(Subject     4.     He  who  takes  what  isn't  his'n,  when  he's 
Sentence)  cotched  will  go  to  prison. 

(Adv.  sentence). 
5.     Come  and  see  me  next  time  you  are  here. 

(Adv.  sentence). 
(Subject  6.  What  you  say  does  not  interest  me. 
Sentence)  at  all.     (Adv.  phrase). 


junctions 


38  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

You   will   find   occurring   in   sentences   which   you 
examine  two  other  sorts  of  words  which  have  not  yet 
been  noticed. 
§11         The  first  sort  are  words  you  use  freely — CONJUNC- 
Con-  TIONS.     Here  are  some  at  work. 

1.  Mr.  Jones  and  his  friends  made  a  great  noise. 

2.  •  It  is  expensive  but  good. 

3.  I  took  my  umbrella  because  I  thought  it  would  rain. 

4.  They  cost  two  or  three  shillings  apiece. 

5.  He  did  it,  though  I  told  him  not  to. 

6.  We  thought  that  it  would  make  no  difference. 

Such  words  as  these  are  used  for  joining  things  to- 
gether, words  or  sentences.  There  are  two  kinds.  The 
first  kind  joins  only  like  things  together,  such  as  two 
principal  sentences,  two  Objects,  two  Adjectives  which 
are  helping  the  same  Noun,  and  so  on.  Here  are  some 
at  work. 

1.  Mr.  Jones  and  his  friends  made  a  great  noise. 

2.  It  is  expensive  but  good. 

3.  They  cost  two  or  three  shillings  apiece. 

The  second  kind  do  joining  work  too,  but  of  a  some- 
what different  kind.  They  join  some  of  the  replacing 
sentences  mentioned  above  on  to  the  main  sentences. 
Why  some  only,  you  will  learn  later  on.  You  can 
always  tell  them  ;  they  stand  right  at  the  beginning 
of  the  replacing  sentences.     See  sentences  3,  5,    and  6. 


§12        The  second  kind  of  word  is  called  a  PREPOSITION. 

Pre-  Here  are  some  at  work. 

positions         ^     We  sat  under  the  tree> 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  39 


1  am  going  to  London. 


There  is  no  water  in  the  well. 
The  clock  stands  between  the  door  and  the  fireplace. 
The  field  is  full  of  turnips. 
I  said  nothing  whatever  to  him. 
It  has  nothing  to  do  with  him. 
Search  for  similar  words  in  any  of  your  sets  of  live 
sentences.     Make  a  list  of  the  words  you  find. 

What  are  they  doing  ?  Notice  in  the  first  place  they 
are  always  before  a  Noun  or  a  Pronoun  ;  they  are,  in  a 
sense,  servants  of  this  word  ;  they  express  its  connection 
with  some  other  word  in  the  sentence. 

You  will  see  this  more  easily  when  you  grasp  the  fact 
that,  with  the  Noun,  they  always  make  an  Adjective 
or  Adverb  phrase. 

To  do  this  pick  out  and  label  the  phrases  in  the  above 
group  of  sentences,  thus — 

"  We  sat  under  the  tree." 
"  Under  the  tree  "  is  a  phrase  describing  where  sitting 
went  on.     It  helps  the  Verb.     It  is  therefore  an  Adverb, 
and  the  word  "  under  "  brings  °  tree  "  into  connection 
with  the  sitting. 

When  you  have  learnt  more  about  the  Preposition  a 
chapter  or  two  on,  come  back  and  trace  the  connections 
in  a  similar  way  for  the  other  sentences,  also  for  any 
Prepositions  you  find  at  work  in  your  own  sets  of  live 
sentences.  For  the  present,  however,  it  is  too  soon 
to  speak  of  the  $xact  work  of  either  Prepositions  or 
Conjunctions. 

Learn  to  recognise  the  two  tools  when  you  see  them 
in  use. 


40  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

You  can  generally  tell  them  both  by  their  position. 
We  shall  discuss  by  and  by  what  we  do  with  them. 


Summary  The  main  summary  of  the  work  of  the  parts  of  speech 
therefore  is*  as  follows  : — 

The  VERB  does  the  central  work,  describing  the  state 
or  the  action. 

The  NOUNS  do  the  other  important  work,  describing 
the  SUBJECTS  and  the  OBJECTS. 

The  PRONOUNS  take  their  places  sometimes. 

The  SERVANT  work  for  the  Verb  is  done  by  the 
ADVERB,  that  for  the  Nouns  by  the  ADJECTIVE. 

Collections  of  words — that  is  to  say  phrases  or  whole 
sentences — can  do  duty  for  Adjectives  or  Adverbs  or 
Nouns.  It  is  in  these  collections  that  the  PREPOSI- 
TIONS are  wanted. 

CONJUNCTIONS  do  not  do  the  real  business  of  the 
sentence,  but  help  to  stick  together  the  words,  or  sets 
of  words,  that  do. 

So  much  for  the  work  that  words  have  to  do.  The 
next  thing  will  be  to  examine  the  way  they  do  it. 

Note. — The  Verb  will  often  be  spoken  of  in  the  future  as  ex- 
pressing action.  This  is  for  shortness  only.  The  word  "action  " 
in  this  connection  will  mean  where  necessary  "Action  or 
State." 


CHAPTER    II. 
INFLECTION. 

You  yourself  in  your  everyday  speech  are  constantly     §1 
changing  the  form  of  words;  e.g.,  you  turn  "pig"  to  Changes  in 
"pigs,"    "speak"    to    "spoke,"    and    so    on.      Find  t^e°frds  and 
twenty  or  thirty  words  which  change  in  this  way.  Meaning 

Notice  that  some  of  them  change  twice.  Man,  men, 
men's.     Say,  said,  saidst.     Find  some  such  words. 

Some  words  again  do  not  change  at  all.     Find  some. 

The  change  is  sometimes  done  in  the  middle,  like 
man,  men,  but  oftenest  by  addition,  like  pig,  pigs. 

What  we  have  now  to  discover  is  what  these  changes 
are  for.  The  kind  of  answer  you  feel  inclined  to  give 
give  is  "  Feminine,"  "  Plural."  Avoid  any  such 
answer  :    it  means  nothing. 

What  does  "  pigs  "  mean  that  "  pig  "  does  not  ?  That 
there  is  more  than  one  pig.     The  "  more  than  one  " 
idea   is   therefore  due  to  the  — s  ;    that  is  to  say  — s 
adds  on  to  "pig"  a  new  idea.     What  is  it  ? 
Speak.     Spoke. 

What  does  "  spoke  "  mean  that  "  speak  "  does  not  ? 
That  the  action  is  finished  ;  it  has  occurred  in  past  time. 

The  idea  of  past  time  is  therefore  due  to  the  "o," 
that  is  to  say  "  o  "  adds  a  new  idea  to  "  speak."  What 
is  it  ? 

Hero.     Heroine. 

What  does  "  heroine  "  mean  that  "  hero  "  does  not  ? 
That  we  are  talking  of  a  lady,  i.e.,  — "  ine  "  adds 
a  new  idea  to  "  hero."     What  is  it  ? 

4i 


42  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Here  then  are  three  words  which  have  been  changed 
or  added  to.     Dozens  more  might  be  found. 

What  has  the  change  done  each  time  ?  It  has  added 
a  new  idea. 

What  were  the  three  ideas  added  ?  "  More  than 
one,"  "  past  time,"  and  that  "  it  is  a  lady." 

Changes  are  made  therefore  always  for  the  same 
general  purpose, — to  add  some  extra  thought.  As  you 
see  above,  the  thought  added  may  be  of  various  kinds. 

Such  changes  are  called  INFLECTIONS. 

We  may  define  them  thus  :— An  INFLECTION  is  a 
change  in  or  an  addition  to  the  stem  of  a  word  to  add 
to  the  original  idea  of  the  word  an  additional  idea. 

Note. — When  words  are  altered  or  added  to  in  this 
way  there  is  a  part  of  the  word  which  changes  and  a 
part  which  on  the  whole  does  not. 

The  part  which  on  the  whole  does  not  change  is 
called   the   stem. 

e.g.,  Laugh-s.     Laugh-ed.     Laugh-ing. 


§2         Examine  now  the  different  sorts  of  words. 
The  Words      Which  of  them  change,  and  what  for  ? 

££.,  N0™s- 

and  why         Do  these  change  ?  Yes. 

How  ?  i.  Pig.     Pigs. 

What  for  ?  More  than  one. 

Any  more  changes  ?  2.  Pig's  tail. 

What  for  ?  Possession. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  43 

Any  more  ?  3.  Actor.    Actress. 

What  for  ?  To  show  it  is  a  lady. 

There  are  then  at  least  three  separate  sorts  of  changes 
in  Nouns. 
ADJECTIVES. 

Yes.  Nice.     Nicer. 

What  for  ?  To    show    a    comparison    with 

something  else. 

Any  more  ?  No. 

PRONOUNS. 

He.     Him. 

What  for  ? 

Investigate  this  for  yourselves.     What  does  "  him  " 
mean  that  "  he  "  does  not  ?    What  does  "  he  "  mean 
that  "  him  "  does  not  ?    Look  at  some  sentences,  e.g., 
He  broke  the  window. 
His  mother  whipped  him. 
VERBS. 

Speak.     Spoke. 

What  for  ?  To  show  the  time  of  the  action. 

Speak.     Speaks. 

What  for  ?  To  show  the  person  of  the 

action. 

There  are  therefore  two  changes  at  least  for  Verbs. 
There  are  others  besides. 
ADVERBS. 

Soon.     Sooner. 

What  for  ?  Like   the   Adjective,    to    show 

comparison. 
PREPOSITIONS  do  not  change. 
CONJUNCTIONS  do  not  change. 


44  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Ex.  1 6.  Make  a  list  of  the  parts  of  speech. 

Divide  it  into  three  lists. 

i.     Those  which  change  most. 

2.  Those  which  change  less. 

3.  Those  which  do  not  change  at  all. 
Compare  these  lists  with  the  summary  of  the  work 

of  the  different  parts  of  speech  at  the  end  of  Chapter  I. 


§3  Again,  it  is  essential  for  you  to  get  firmly  fixed  in 

your  mind  this  great  principle. 

No  word  is  ever  altered  for  nothing. 
Every  alteration  means  something. 
Examine  some  of  the  words  in  your  own  speech  which 
you  yourselves  alter,  thus — 
Take  a  set  of  live  sentences. 
Ex.  17.  Make  a  list  of  every  altered  word  you  can  find. 

Analysis         Opposite  each  word  write  all  the  separate  meanings 
Inflections  there  are  in  it  :    thus — 

"  Boys'  boots  are  smaller  than  men's  boots." 
Boys.         How  many  ideas  ? 

1.  Boy.  (The  original  one). 

2.  More  than  one. 

3.  Possession. 
Boots.         How  many  ideas  ? 

1.  Boot. 

2.  More  than  one. 
Are.           How  many  ideas  ? 

1.  Being. 

2.  Being  now. 

3.  That  more  than  one  person  or 

thing  is  "  being." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  45 

Smaller.     How  many  ideas. 

1.  Small. 

2.  Comparison. 

and  so  on. 

Repeat  this  till  you  can  see  at  a  glance  the  different 
meanings  that  have  been  added  to  the  original  meaning 
of  any  word. 

You  will  no  doubt  find  some  words  which  will  puzzle 
you,  e.g.,  "going." 

Think  them  out  if  you  can.  Do  not  worry,  however, 
if  you  are  unable  to  do  this,  but  put  them  on  one  side, 
to  go  back  to  later,  or  to  ask  about. 

You  should  do  this,  whenever  you  come  across  any 
form  in  your  own  speech  which  you  cannot  understand. 
Remember,  such  forms  are  your  own  forms :  you  should 
take  the  same  interest  in  finding  out  what  they  really 
are,  that  you  would  in  a  strange  beast  in  the  back 
garden.  Lock  him  up  to  study  at  your  leisure,  or  get 
someone  to  come  in  and  identify  him. 


We  have  seen  that  inflections  are  additions  to  or     §4 
alterations  in  words,  which  add  to  the  original  meaning  The  Al- 
of  the  word  an  extra  meaning.  ternative 

This  is  not,  however,  the  only  way  of  doing  this  work,  inflection 
"  The  pig's  tail." 

Can  you  say  this  differently  ? 

"The  tail  of  the  pig." 

What  is  the  difference  ? 

There  is  no  difference  in  meaning. 

The  two  sets  of  words  say  the  same  thing,  but  the 
extra  idea,  possession,  has  been  added  in  a  different  way 


46 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


How  ?     By  a  different  word,  not  by  an  inflection. 

This  is  a  new  principle  which  is  directly  opposite  to 
the  old  one. 

Can  you  find  examples  in  your  own  language  where 
this  principle  is  used  ;  i.e.,  where  the  original  word  is  not 
changed  or  added  to  but  a  new  idea  is  added  by  a 
separate  word  or  words  ? 


VERBS. 

I  shall  speak.    - 

New  way. 

I  spoke.             - 

Old  way. 

NOUNS. 

The  boy's  book.         - 

Old  way. 

The  book  of  the  boy. 

New  way. 

Duke.     Duchess.         - 

Old  or  new  ? 

Doctor.     Lady  doctor. 

Old  or  new  ? 

He-goat.     She-goat.    - 

Old  or  new  ? 

Man.     Men. 

Is  this  old  or 
new  ?  Old. 

What  would  be  the  new  ?    Two  man. 

We     have 

not  got  to 

it  yet. 

ADJECTIVES. 

—  Nice.            Nicer. 

—Old. 

—  Beautiful.     More  beautiful.  — New. 

These  two  methods  of  expression  represent  two  great 
lines  along  which  language  has  gone. 

Some  languages  express  themselves  almost  entirely 
in  what  we  have  called  the  old  way — i.e.,  by  alterations 
in  or  additions  to  the  words. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  47 

Greek  and  Latin,  especially  Greek,  are  prominent 
among  such  languages. 

All  modern  languages  tend  to  the  new  way — that  of 
separate  words  ;  but,  inasmuch  as  the  new  languages 
have  grown  out  of  the  old  ones,  there  is  always  some 
mixture  of  the  two  methods.  Some  have  more  of  the 
inflections  and  fewer  of  the  separate  words ;  others 
vice  versa. 

The  free  use  of  separate  words  is  especially  char- 
acteristic of  English. 


It  is  now  possible  to  examine  a  language  other  than     §5 
our  own.     We  will  begin  with  Latin.  Some 

Look  at  these  forms  :-  {*£*£ 

i.     Naut  -  a. 

2.  Naut-a-m. 

3.  Naut-a-e. 

What  is  all  this  ?  A  Latin  noun  with  inflections  on 
it,  each  for  a  purpose,  like  "  The  pig's  tail."  It  means 
various  things  about  a  sailor. 

Naut-a  is  the  portion  which  means  "  sailor."  Each 
of  the  inflections  is  to  add  on  an  extra  idea.  What 
idea  is  the  whole  point  ? 

Naut — is  like  a  brace,  the  other  things  like  a  set  of  bits 

What  particular  work  are  they  each  for  ? 

No.  1,  which  is  as  it  were  the  original  form,  unchanged 
denotes  this  idea, — that  the  Naut-a  (i.e.,  the  sailor) 
is  the  doer  of  the  action,  or,  if  the  verb  happens  to  be  a 
state  verb,  the  person  or  thing  who  is  in  the  state,  i.e., 
the  Naut-a  is  the  Subject  of  the  sentence. 


48  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Do   English   nouns,    when   subjects,   have   a   special 
termination  like  this  ?    No. 
gher  .        Yet  we  constantly  have  to  express  the  idea  that  a 
Alterna-  certain  person  is  the  doer  of  an  action. 
tives  How  is  it  done  ? 

Examine  this  sentence  : — 

Jones  Brown  kicked. 

Who  kicked  whom  ? 

Rearrange  the  sentence  to  indicate  that  Jones  did  the 
kicking ;  or  again  to  indicate  that  Brown  did  the  kicking. 

Can  you  see  by  what  means  we  indicate  the  Subject  ? 
Order,  i.e.,  the  work  that  Latin  does  in  this  case  by 
the  help  of  that  -a  we  do  by  arranging  our  words  in  a 
certain  order. 

Though  we  do  not  change  Nouns  to  indicate  the 
Subject,  do  we  change  them  at  all  ?     Yes. 

What  for  ?  To  add  the  idea  of  possession,  or  the 
idea  of  number,  i.e.,  we  do  similar  things  but  not  this 
particular  thing.  This  particular  idea  we  express  by 
means  of  order. 

Now  No.  2.     Naut-a-m. 

What  is  this  for  ?  Something  like  Naut — a,  but  to 
show  a  different  thing. 

Naut-a  unchanged  showed  that  the  Naut- a  was  doing 
something. 

Naut-a-m  shows  that  the  Naut-a  is  having  something 
done  to  him. 

Do  you  remember  anything  like  this  ?  "he," 
"  him,"  showed  the  same  thing. 

No.  3.     Naut-a-e. 

What  does  this  show  ?  That  the  Naut-a  possesses 
something. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  49 

What  is  this  like  ?     Pig's  tail. 

We  see  therefore,  so  far  three  inflections  in  Nouns, 
each  adding  a  special  idea. 

Recapitulate  the  ideas  they  add. 

There  are  other  similar  ones  to  come. 

The  general  name  of  this  kind  of  Noun  inflection  is 
CASE. 

We  have  special  cases  to  denote  the  addition  of 
special  ideas,  and  of  course  each  special  case  has  a 
special  name. 

Thus  No.  1,  which  gave  the  idea  of  the  noun  being 
the  Subject  we  might  appropriately  call  the  Subject 
Case.    It  is  usually  called  the  Nominative  Case. 

No.  2,  which  added  the  idea  of  the  Noun  being  the 
Object,  we  might  appropriately  call  the  Object  Case. 
English  does  sometimes  call  it  the  Objective  Case.  In 
Latin  it  is  generally  called  the  Accusative  Case. 

No.  3,  which  added  the  idea  of  the  noun  being  the 
possessor  of  something,  we  might  appropriately  call 
the  Possessive  Case.  English  nouns  have  this  case  and 
this  onlv.     In  Latin  it  is  called  the  Genitive  Case. 


You  have  now  had  put  into  your  hands  a  tool — the 
Case  tool — that  is  new  and  rather  strange  to  you. 

It  is  a  Greek  or  Roman  tool  rather  than  a  modern 
English  one.  * 

D 


50  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

It  is  not  the  slightest  good  owning  or  learning  about 
such  a  tool,  unless  you  use  it.  This  is  the  next  thing 
you  have  to  do. 

You  cannot  use  it  on  any  ambitious  work  yet,  but  you 
can  use  it  thus  : — Collect  a  few  more  simple  nouns  like 
Naut  -  a, 

Ros  -  a,  a  rose,    Mens  -  a,  a  table,    Penn  -  a, 
a  feather,  Agricol  -  a,  a  farmer,  are  such  nouns. 
Then  practise  thus  : — 

I  saw  a  sailor.     -    -     Naut  -  What  ?    naut  -  am 
I  broke  the  leg  of  the  table,    mens  -  What  ? 
Ex.  1 8.  Similarly,  The  sailor  is  merry. 

The  sailor  sings. 
He  tore  the  sailor's  trousers. 
The  farmer  loves  the   sailor  but  the  sailor  does 

not  love  the  farmer. 
A  hen  has  feathers. 
A  rose  grows  in  the  garden. 
Write  for  yourselves  some  sentences  about   sailors 
and  farmers  and  feathers,  and  see  how  far  the  tools  yotJ 
have  will  enable  you  to  express  yourself  in  Latin.    Never 
mind  if  you  cannot  always  do  it.     It  only  means  you 
want  a  few  more  tools.     You  will  get  them  later  on. 


§6  Again,  we  have  been  talking  about  nouns  and  their 
changes,  but,  as  you  have  already  learnt,  you  cannot 
say  sentences  without  verbs. 

Latin  Verb      Let  us  look  at  a  Latin  one.     Have  is  a  useful  one. 

Inflections  Hab  -  e  -  o. 

Present  TT  , 

Time  Hab  -  e  -  s. 

Hab  -  e  - 1. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  51 

What  is  this  ?    A  verb  with  inflections. 
It  is  like 

I  hav-e. 

Thou  hav-e -st.     (hast). 

He  hav-e-s.  (has). 

What  do  we  put  the  inflections  on  the  English  verbs 
for  ? 

So  far,  two  things.     To  show  : — 

1.  Time  of  the  action. 

2.  The  person  acting. 
Now  examine  Hab  -  e  -  o. 

What  does  hab  -  e  mean  ?        Having  now. 
What  does  —  o  mean  ?  That  I  am  doing  it. 

Similarly  hab-e-s  equals  "  having  now,"  "that 
you  are  doing  it." 

Similarly  hab  -  e  -  t  equals  "  having  now,"  "  that  he 
is  doing  it." 

Here  is  another  tool  put  into  your  hands,  a  tense 
tool. 

It  is  not  such  a  strange  one  to  you  as  the  case  tool, 
for  you  use  tense  tools  in  your  own  language.  Can  you 
think  of  any  ? 

Practise  with  it  and  notice  that  with  the  two  tools 
you  can  now  make  sense. 
Practise  thus : — 

Say  in  Latin  : — The  sailor  has  a  table.  E*.  19. 

— I  have  a  feather. 
— I  have  a  rose. 
— The  farmer  has  a  table. 
You  are  short  of  some  verbs.     Collect  a  few  more  like 
hab  -  e  -  o  and  say  some  things  with  them  and  the  nouns 
vou  collected  before. 


52 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


Plural 
Inflection 


You  will  find  in  the  course  of  saying  things  that  you 
will  want  to  say  not  only  sentences  like  "  I  have  a  rose," 
but  sentences  like  "  They  have  some  roses." 

You  have  not  yet  got  the  tools  either  for  saying  "  they 
have,"  or  for  saying  "  more  than  one  rose."  There 
are  such  tools.     They  are  just  like  the  rest. 

The  inflections  for  saying  "  more  than  one  rose," 
or  "  sailor,"  or  whatever  it  may  be,  you  will  find  two 
pages  on. 

Here  are  the  verb  tools  you  need.  They  are  just  like 
the  first  three. 

Hab  -  e  -  mus     Having  now.    We  are  doing  it. 
Hab-e-tis  You        „ 

Hab-e-nt  They       „ 

We  have,  then,  a  set  of  half-a-dozen  forms,  all  alike 
in  adding  to  the  verb  the  idea  of  "  doing  it  now  "  but 
adding  the  ideas  of  different  persons. 

This  "  doing  it  now  "  set  is  called  the  PRESENT 
TENSE. 


Perfect 

Tense 

Inflection 


Again,  not  all  actions  are  done  now  :  some  have  been 
done  in  the  past,  some  are  going  to  be  done  in  the 
future.  Therefore  to  speak  of  them  at  least  two  more 
such  sets  will  be  needed. 

Here  they  are  for  the  "  have  "  Verb. 
Hab-u-i        -  Having  in  past  time.     I  did  it. 
Hab-u-isti    -      „  „  Thou  didst  it. 

Hab-u-it       -      „  etc.  He 

Hab-u-imus-     ,,  .  We 

Hab-u-Jtis    -  "1,?»$  You 

Hab  -  u  -  erunt  They 

This  set  is  called  the  PERFECT  TENSE. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  53 

Hab  -  eb  -  o       -     Having  in  future  time.     I  shall  have.  Future 

Hab-eb-is     -  Te°se 

Inflection 

Hab-eb-it     -  etc. 

Hab  -  eb  -  imus 
Hab-eb-itis  - 
Hab  -  eb  -  unt  - 
This  set  is  called  the  FUTURE  TENSE. 


Now  practise  with  these  tense  tools,  as  you  did  with 
the  Present  tense  tool.  Combine  them  with  the  nouns 
you  collected  before,  to  make  simple  sentences. 

If  you  are  not  going  to  learn  any  Latin,  do  it  all  the 
more.  What  you  are  learning  is  not  Latin,  but  how 
a  tense  tool  and  a  case  tool  between  them  can  say  things. 
You  can  learn  this  from  what  has  gone  before,  even  if 
you  never  learn  another  word  of  Latin. 


We  will  now  return  to  our  Latin  noun.  §7 

We  spoke  of  three  Cases.     What  are  they  for  ? 

The  Nominative  (the  Subject  case)  is  the  inflection 
which  shows  the  noun  is  doing  something. 

The  Accusative  (the  Object  case)  is  the  inflection  which 
shows  the  noun  is  the  receiver  of  an  action. 

The  Genitive  (the  Possessive  case)  is  the  inflection 
which  shows  the  noun  possesses  something. 

Often,  however,  we  want  to  show  other  things  about 


54  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

nouns  as  well  as  these,  e.g.,  that  there  is  more  than  one 

and  that  they  are  doing  something. 

Plural  For  example  : 

Case 

Inflection  Tne  sailors  sing. 

We  can  say  already  : 

The  sailor  sings. 

How  ?    Naut  -  a. 

We  clearly  want  another  change  to  add  the  "  more 

than  one  "  idea. 

Here  is  the  change.     Naut-ae. 

Naut -a       -    one  nauta    -    doing  something. 

Naut-  a- e  -    more  than  one  nauta  -  doing 

something. 

Both  these  inflections  are  called   Nominative  Cases. 

One  is  called  the  Nominative  Singular,  and  the  other 

the  Nominative  Plural.    They  pair. 

In  exactly  the  same  way  we  often  want  to  say  that 

sailors  have  something  done  to  them. 

Here  is  the  pair  of  corresponding  forms, 

Naut  -  am  Naut  -  as. 

Or  again  that  they  own  something. 

Here   are   the   corresponding   forms. 

Naut  -  ae.  Naut  -  arum. 

There  are  therefore  two  sets  of  Cases,  the  first  set  for 

one  only,  the  second  for  more  than  one. 

These  are  called — The  Singular  Set. 

—The  Plural  Set. 

We  have  examples  of  the  same  thing  in  English. 

Find  some. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Subject  Case    -  The  man  fights.     Men  fight. 

Possessive  Case.  The  man's  boots.     Men's  boots. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  55 

As  was  said  above,  the  three  Cases  we  spoke  of  are  §8 
not  all  the  Case  inflections  that  nouns  possess.  There 
is  one  very  important  one,  which  might  be  called  the 
Indirect  Object  Case,  and  which  in  Latin  is  called  the 
Dative  Case.  This  is  put  on  to  show  that  the  noun 
suffers  the  action  indirectly. 

If  the  action  were  suffered  directly,  the  Accusative 
case  would  of  course  be  needed. 

You  will  remember  learning  about  Object  No.   2.  Furt}!er 
What  was  it  ?  Case 

Just  as  the  Accusative  case  is  put  on  to  show  that  the  InHec"ons 
Noun  has  something  done  to  it  directly,  i.e.,  is  the  Dative 
Object,  so  the  Dative  is  put  on  to  show  that  the  noun 
has  something  done  to  it  indirectly,  i.e.,  is  the  Second 
or  Indirect  Object. 

In  the  case  of  the  Nauta  the  change  is  Naut  -  ae 
(like  the  Genitive). 

If  there  is  more  than  one,  the  change  is  Naut  -  is. 

There  are  two  other  Cases  you  will  learn  more  about 
later,  but  which  you  need  merely  notice  now. 

One  is  called  the  Vocative    (the  addressing  Case),  vocative 
which  adds  on  to  the  noun  the  idea  of  address. 
O  Sailor. 
You  will  not  often  need  to  use  this  Case. 
The  other  is  called  the  Ablative  and  adds  on  any  one 
of  two  or  three  ideas,  those  roughly  represented  by  the 
words  "  by,"  "  with,"  or  "  from." 
Thus  if  you  want  to  say  : 

The  child  was  rescued  by  a  sailor.  Ablative 

I  went  for  a  walk  with  a  sailor. 
I  had  a  letter  from  a  sailor. 


56  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

the  Ablative  case,  Naut  -a  expresses,  (or  at  least  helps 
to  express)  any  one  of  these  thoughts. 

In  other  words,  the  Ablative  case  has  two  or  three 
tasks  to  fulfil.  It  is  a  tool  which  has  several  different 
uses. 


You  will  find  it  not  at  all  uncommon  in  all  languages, 
to  use  a  word  tool,  whether  a  separate  word  or  an  in- 
flection to  mean  two  or  three  different  things. 

For  example — the  word  "  this  "  has  several  uses  in 
the  English.     Look  at  the  sentences  : 
Whose  is  this  book  ? 
This  does  not  please  me  at  all. 

The  word  "  this  "  has  two  different  pieces  of  work 
to  do  in  these  two  sentences  :  it  is  first  an  adjective, 
then  a  pronoun. 

In  the  same  way  the  Ablative  inflection  means  at 
one  time  one  thing  and  at  another,  another.  The 
second  will  probably  be  related  to  the  first,  but  still  some- 
what different. 

You  need  not,  however,  worry  about  this.  What 
is  meant  in  any  particular  sentence  will  generally  be 
pretty  clear. 

The  main  thing  to  remember  is  that  the  Case  ending 
means  something.  A  noun  with  it  on  is  not  the  same 
as  a  noun  without  it. 

Just  as  the  first  three  Cases  had  plural  counterparts, 
so  have  these  three. 

You  should  note,  too,  that  though  j  ust  now  for  clear- 
ness we  spoke  of  the  cases  as  adding  a  single  idea  (posses- 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  57 

sion,  object,  etc.),  yet  the  real  account  is  that,  except 
the  Nominative,  they  add  groups  of  ideas,  of  which 
the  single  idea  you  have  had  is  the  main  one.  This 
too  is  a  refinement  you  need  not  worry  about  at  present. 


As  we  have  seen,  Tense  is  that  inflection  of  the  verb      §9 
which  adds  the  idea  of  the  time  of  the  action.  Further 

As  there  are  three  possible  times  for  an  action,  there  J-ffleetions. 
will  be  three  groups  of  tenses. 

If  we  never  wanted  to  speak  of  anything  but  a  plain 
Present,  Past  or  Future  action  (or  state)  there  would  be 
three  plain  tenses  only. 

We   often,   however,   want   to   say   more   than   this. 

We  may  want  to  say,  for  example,  that  an  action 
started  in  the  past  may  be  going  on  still — may  be  in  fact 
unfinished. 

We  express  this  by  a  Tense  which  we  may  call  the  IM-  Imperfect 
PERFECT   OR    UNFINISHED   TENSE. 

Here  is  such  a  Tense  : 

Latin.       Ama-ba-m     }    ,     .  ;.       « 

lovmg — past  time  but 

unfinished.  I  was  doing  it. 


French.    J'aim-ais 
Eng.         I  was  loving 


Or  we  may  want  to  say  that  it  started  in  the  past,  and 
is  over  and  done  with  now — is  in  fact  finished. 


58  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

We  express  this  by  a  tense  which  we  may  call  the 

PERFECT  or  FINISHED  TENSE. 

Here  is  such  a  Tense  : 

Latin  Ama  -  v  -  i  .     .                  A.       , 

_       ,  T,  .              .  loving — past  time  but 

French.  Taim-a-i  *  >  *_  j      t    t,  -± 

„  i  .          ,  finished.     I  did  it. 

Eng.  I  have  loved.  / 


Or  we  may  want  to  say  that  the  action  started  in  the 
past,  and  was  over  and  done  with  a  long  time  ago — 
is  more  than  finished  in  fact. 

We  express  this  by  a  Tense  we  may  call  the  PLUPER- 
FECT TENSE  or  the  MORE  THAN  PERFECT  TENSE. 

Here  is  such  a  tense : 

Latin.  Ama- vera -m.  )   ,     .                 ..        ~  . .    , 

_                             .    ,  loving — past  time  finished 

French.  J  avais  aime.  \    .                   ■,,■,■, 

_  i  ,     .  .       ,  long  ago.     I  had  done  it. 

Eng.  I  had  loved.  J 


To  understand  the  difference  between  these  Tenses, 
write  an  Imperfect,  Perfect,  and  Pluperfect  sentence. 
Imperfect.  I  was  killing  the  cat.     How  long  has  the 

cat  been  dead  ? 
Perfect.      I  have  killed  the  cat.     How  long  has  the 
cat  been  dead  ? 
Pluperfect.     I  had  killed  the  cat.     How  long  has  the 
cat  been  dead  ? 


Similarly  in  the  Future  group,  we  have  the  plain 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  59 

FUTURE    TENSE. 

Latin.      Ama  -  b  -  o.   \ 

French.    J'aimerai    -   [  loving — future  time — I. 

Eng.         I  shall  love.   J 

Or  again,  we  may  want  to  say  that  the  action  will 
take  place  and  be  finished  in  the  future. 

We  express  this  by  a  Tense  which  we  may  call  the  Future 
FUTURE  PERFECT  TENSE.  Per,eCt 

Latin.       Ama  -  ver  -  o. 
French.    J  'aurai  aime    -  loving — a  perfect  action  in  the 

future.     I. 
Eng.         I  shall  have  loved. 


To  summarise,  we  have  dealt  so  far  with  Nouns  and 
Verbs. 

Cases  are  additions  which,  up  to  the  present,  have 
been  put  onty  on  to  Nouns,  and  which  carry  some 
additional  meaning.     There  have  been  six. 

i.  The  Case  which  gave  the  idea  that  the  Noun 
was  the  Subject.  We  might  call  it  the  Subject 
Case.     The  usual  name  is  the  Nominative.    • 

2.  The  one  which  added  the  idea  that  the  Noun  was 
the  Object.  We  might  call  it  the  Object  Case. 
English  calls  it  the  Objective  Case.  The  usual 
name  is  the  Accusative. 

3.  The  one  that  added  the  idea  that  the  Noun  was 
the  Indirect  Object.  We  might  call  it  the  In- 
direct Object  Case.  The  usual  name  is  the 
Dative. 

These   three   Cases   are   of  the  utmost   importance, 


60  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

because  they  deal  with  and  describe  three  of  the  main 
parts  of  a  sentence,  the  Subject  and  the  two  Objects. 
Of  the  other  three  Cases  : 

4.  The  Genitive  adds  the  idea  of  possession  and  is 
called  in  English  the  Possessive  Case.  It  is  not 
a  tool  that  is  needed  nearly  so  often  as  the  Nomin- 
ative. It  is  nevertheless  a  useful  Case  and  is  the 
only  one  our  own  Nouns  have  got. 

5.  The  Vocative,  the  addressing  case. 

6.  The  Ablative,  which  adds  "  by,"  "  with,"  "  or," 
"  from  "  ideas. 

Also — the  whole  set  of  six  cases  is  duplicated.  The 
further  set  shows  exactly  the  same  ideas  as  the  old  set, 
with  the  addition  of  the  idea  of  "  more  than  one." 

Verbs  so  far  have  inflections  which  add  : 

1.  The  idea  of  the  time  of  the  action. 

2.  The  idea  of  the  persons  and  the  number  of  them 
who  do  it. 

As  there  can  be  three  sets  of  persons  doing  it,  "  the 
speaker,"  "■  the  person  spoken  to,"  or  "  the  person 
spoken  of,"  there  will  be  three  inflections,  one  for  each. 

Each  set,  like  a  Noun's  set  of  cases,  will  be  dupli- 
cated to  add  the  plural  idea. 

As  there  can  be  only  three  times  in  which  an  action 
takes  place,  Present,  Past  and  Future,  there  will  be 
three  groups  of  Tenses  corresponding  to  these  times. 

Among  the  Past  Tenses  we  have  Tenses  to  distinguish 
between : 

Actions  begun  in  the  past  and  not  yet  finished. 

Actions  begun  in  the  past  but  finished  now. 

Actions  begun  in  the  past  but  finished  a  long  time  ago. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  6l 

Among  the  Future  Tenses  we  have  Tenses  to  dis- 
tinguish between  : 

Actions  to  be  begun  in  the  future. 

Actions  to  be  begun  and  finished  in  the  future. 
There  are  further  distinctions  still  to  come. 


Now  make  yourself  familiar  with  all  these  Tense  tools. 

(i)  By  searching  for  them  and  labelling  them  in  your 
live  sentences.  They  will  be  mainly  done  by  separate 
words  and  not  by  inflections. 

(2)     By  using  them  in  Latin  or  French  to  make  sense 
with  nouns.     In   Latin   use   the   Subject   and   Object  Tense  and 
and  Indirect  Object  Cases.  Case 

You  have  now  between  the  Tenses  and  the  Cases 
quite  enough  tools  to  talk  with. 

Always  remember  that  it  is  useless  to  possess  a  tool 
or  to  learn  about  it  unless  you  use  it. 

The  corresponding  forms  for  the  verb  hab  -  e  -  o  with 
which  you  began  are  : 

Hab  -  eba  -  m  (Imperfect). 

Hab  -  uera  -  m        (Pluperfect) . 
Hab-uer-o  (Future  Perfect). 

The  other  three  tenses  you  have  had  already. 


We  have  dealt  so  far  with  Case  as  an  inflection  of  a    §10 
noun  to  add  an  extra  idea.  Cases  in 

Latin   possesses   half-a-dozen   cases   and   uses  them  j[nd 
extensively.  English 

English  possesses  one  only  for  its  Nouns.    (Boy,  Boy 's) . 


62  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

French  has  none  at  all. 

Both  French  and  English  express  themselves,  when, 
necessary  by  separate  words. 

i.e.,  They  use  the  principle  shown  in : 

"  The  hat  of  the  boy."  "  Le  chapeau  du  gar  con." 
rather  than  that  shown  in  : 

"  The  boy's  hat." 

It  therefore  comes  to  this,  that  Latin  is  the  only  one 
of  the  three  languages  that  uses  Cases  as  a  serious 
means  of  expression. 

It  is  therefore,  only  in  the  study  of  Latin,  among  the 
three,  that  you  will  properly  understand  the  use  fo 
the  Case  tool. 

Note  that  Greek  use's  cases  much  as  Latin  does,  while 
of  modern  languages  German  uses  cases  extensively, 
though  not  so  extensively  as  Latin, 

English  used  to  have  them.  If  you  would  like  to 
see  some,  buy  Chaucer's  Prologue  (you  can  get  it  for 
fourpence)  and  try  and  read  it  for  yourself.  You  will 
see  some  of  these  Cases  on  the  nouns  and  other  in- 
flections on  the  verbs,  which  have  now  disappeared. 
If  you  have  not  got  fourpence,  ask  some  one  to  read  it 
to  you. 


§11         Have  any  other  words  Cases  besides  nouns  ?     Cer- 
ses  o 
her 
Words 


Cases  of  tainly. 
other 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  63 

Pronouns  do  the  work  of  Nouns.  It  is  natural  there- 
fore that  we  should  need  to  add  the  same  ideas  to  them 
that  we  do  to  Nouns,  for  example,  that  the  Pronoun 
is  the  doer  or  the  receiver  of  the  action. 

Pronouns  will  therefore  need  Cases  as  much  as  nouns. 

In  English  pronouns  have  cases — the  Subject  Case 

and  the  Object  Case. 

Find  some.  Norn.  He.  We.  Pronoun 

Cases 
Ace.  Him.       Us. 

"  Him  "  and  similar  pronouns  are  the  only  Accusa- 
tive or  Object  cases  in  English. 

In  French  the  pronoun  has  the  Subject  Case,  the 
Object  Case,  and  the  Indirect  Object  Case,  i.e.,  Nomin- 
ative, Accusative  and  Dative,  e.g.  : 


Nom. 

11. 

Nom.  Je. 

Ace. 

Le 

•  or  again 

Ace.     Me. 

Dat. 

Lui. 

Dat.     Me. 

Latin  Pronouns  have  all  the  Cases. 


Do  Adjectives  have  Cases  ?  Adjective 

No  Adjective  has  a  Case  in  English  or  French. 

In  Latin  an  Adjective  always  has  a  Case.  The  mean- 
ing of  the  Case  of  the  Adjective,  however,  is  not  the  same 
as  the  meaning  of  the  Case  of  the  Noun  (though  it  is 
put  on  for  the  same  general  purpose). 

The  Nominative  Case  of  the  Noun  implies  that 
the  Noun  is  the  Subject  of  the  Sentence. 

The  Adjective  which  belongs  to  the  Noun  has  a  Nom- 
inative Case  ending  too,  but  it  is  not  to  show  that  the 
Adjective  is  the  subject  of  the .  sentence.    That  would 


64  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

be  nonsense.  It  is  to  show  that  the  Adjective  belongs 
to  a  Noun  which  is  the  Subject  of  the  sentence.  In 
other  words,  the  Adjective  wears  the  livery  of  its 
master,  the  Noun. 


Summary      The  general  idea  which  a  Case  adds  to  a  word  is  this  : 
A  Case  is  that  change  in  or  addition  to  the  stem  of  a 
word  which  adds  to  the  original  idea  of  the  word  the 
additional  idea  of  the  word's  particular  connection  with 
some  other  word  in  the  sentence. 
For  example  : 
The  Nominative  adds  the  idea 
of  the  Noun's  particular  con- 
nection with  -        -    The  Verb  (Subj.) 
The  Accusative  adds  the  idea 
of  the  Noun's  particular  con- 
nection with  -        -    The  Verb  (Obj.) 
The  Dative  adds  the  idea  of  the 
Noun's  particular  connection 
with  -    The  Verb  (Ind.  Obj.) 
The  Genitive  adds  the  idea  of 
the   Noun's   particular   con- 
nection with            -        -    Another  Noun. 
The  Ablative  adds  the  idea  of 
the   Noun's  particular   con- 
nection with            -        -    The  Verb 

An  Ablative  Case  is  like  an  Adverb.     It 
makes  an  Adverb  phrase. 
An  Adjective's  Case  adds  the  idea  of  its  particular 
connection  with  the  Noun  it  belongs  to. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  65 

Since  some  languages  have  Cases  and  some  have  not,     §12 

there  must  be  some  other  way  of  doing  the  work  that  The  Al- 

fav,  Hn  ternatives 

teases  do.  to  Cases 

The  Nominative,  for  example,  says  the  Noun  does 
an  action. 

The  Accusative  says  the  Noun  receives  an  action. 

The  Dative  says  the  Noun  indirectly  receives  an  action. 

How  do  we  say  these  things  in  English,  for  say  them 
we  often  must  ? 

We  say  many  of  them  by  means  of  ORDER. 

Thus  a  Noun  standing  in  a  certain  place  before  the  Order 
Verb  is  equivalent  to  a  Noun  with  a  Nominative  in- 
flection on  it. 

Similarly  for  the  Accusative  Case,  and  often  for  the 
Dative  Case. 

The  Latin  case  tool,  therefore  (in  the  Nominative,  Ac- 
cusative, and  sometimes  in  the  Dative  cases)  is  replaced 
in  English  by  the  order  tool. 

In  the  other  cases,  English,  (except  for  the  use  of 
the  possessive  case)  and  French  always  replace  the  case 
tool  by  a  separate  word. 

Here  are  three  parallel  sets  of  expressions  : 
Latin.  French.  English. 

Fratris.  (Gen.)    de     mon  frere.     The  son  of  my  brother. 

Fratri.    (Dat.)    a      mon  frere.     I  gave  it  to  my  brother. 

(cum)  Fratre.   (Abl.)    aveo  mon  frere.     I  went  with  my  brother. 
(a)       Fratre.  (Abl.)    par  mon  frere.     It  was  built  by  my  brother. 

Examine  some  of  the  separate  words  in  the  English 
column  :     of,   by,  with,  to. 

Can  you  find  any  more  ?  in,  under,  on,  above,  from, 
etc. 

E 


66  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

§13        All  these  words  are  of  the  same  kind. 
Preposi-  They  are  PREPOSITIONS  :    the  words  we  noticed 

and  postponed. 

What  are  they  doing  ?  Clearly  the  same  sort  of  work 
as  Cases. 

What  is  that  ?  To  show  the  particular  connection 
between  the  word  they  belong  to  and  some  other  word 
in  the  sentence. 

Here  then  is  the  work  of  Prepositions.  It  is  connect- 
ing work,  like  the  work  of  Case. 

Do  they  replace  all  Cases  ?    No. 

Which  ? 

What  in  the  nature  of  things  must  a  Preposition  have 
after  it  ?     A  Noun  or  a  Pronoun. 

A  Preposition  without  a  Noun  would  be  like  a  Case 
ending  without  a  Noun. 

Remember  therefore  that  a  Preposition  belongs  to 
the  Noun  or  Pronoun  it  is  attached  to,  in  precisely  the 
same  way  that  the  Case  ending  does,  nor  can  any  word 
without  a  Noun  or  a  Pronoun  following  (or  at  any  rate 
understood)  be  a  Preposition. 

Notice,  too,  the  way  in  which  these  Prepositions 
come  into  sentences  : 

"  The  tail  of  the  bird  was  visible." 
"  The  turnip  grows  in  the  field" 
"  The  tree  in  the  playground  was  struck  by  light- 
ning." 

What  is  in  the  field?  Adverb  phrase. 

What  is  in  the  playground  ?  Adjective  phrase. 

What  is  by  lightning?  Adverb  phrase. 

What  is  of  the  bird?  Adjective  phrase. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  67 

The  work  of  the  Preposition,  therefore,  lies  among 
the  subordinate  parts  of  the  sentence. 

It  makes  Adjective  or  Adverb  phrases,  which  do  the 
servant  work  of  the  sentences. 


Now  study  Prepositions  at  work. 

Search  your  live  sentences  for  them  and  collect  as 
usual  twenty  or  thirty  examples. 

They  will  all  be  helping  to  make  a  phrase,  sometimes 
an  Adjective  phrase,  sometimes  an  Adverb  phrase. 
He  got  under  the  table." 

Label  the  phrase.     This  one  is  an  Adverb  helping  got.  E 

What    therefore    is    the    Preposition    doing  ?     Con-  Preposi- 
necting  table  with  got.  *ions 

"  The  man  in  the  train  told  me  so." 

Label  the  phrase.     It  is  an  Adjective  helping  man, 
therefore  in  connects  train  with  man. 

Examine  : 

11  The  man  told  me  so  in  the  train," 
and  as  many  more  live  sentences  as  are  necessary  to 
give  you  mastery  over  the  tool  and  an  understanding 
of  its  work. 


If  you  are  learning  French  and  Latin,  extract  from    §14 
the  respective  Grammars  the   Present  Tenses  of  any 
Verb  you  like. 

Place  the  English  Tense  with  them,  thus  : —  Tense 

1.  Finio.  Inflections 

T         r      •  llltne 

2.  Je  finis.  Three 

3.  I  finish.  Languages 


68  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Are  there  any  more  English  Tenses  showing  a  present 
action  ? 

"1  am  finishing."     Put  it  with  the  rest. 
Finio. 
Je  finis. 
I  finish. 
I  am  finishing. 
Examine  these  : — 

How  much  inflection  is  there     in  the  first  ? 

in  the  second  ? 
in  the  third  ? 
Take  any  Tense  you  please  and  repeat  the  process. 
You  will  always  find  inflections  strongest  in  Latin, 
and  the  separate  word  principle  strongest  in  English. 

Note   how  the   separate   word   principle   sometimes 
results  in  three  or  four  tense  tools  for  the  same  thing, 
often  almost  indistinguishable,  and  undeniably  clumsy. 
Compare  : 

Finiam. 
Je  finirai. 
I  shall  finish. 
I  will  finish. 
I  am  going  to  finish. 
I  am  about  to  finish. 
I  shall  be  finishing. 
Again,  do  you  notice  anytihng  about  a  Tense  such  as 
J'aimerai  ? 

What  difference  is  there  between  this  and  "  amabo  "  ? 
The  person  work  is  done  twice  on  it,  one  by  Je,  a 
separate  word,  once   by    " — ai,"  the  person  part  of  the 
inflection. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  69 

Can  you  think  of  any  example  of  work  done  twice  like 
this  in  your  own  language  ? 

"  Thou  lovedst." 
"  He  loves,"  or  again  "  Two  men."  (*'  Two  man  "  is  xhedoubl 

the  logical  form).  forms 

It  is  the  middle  stage  of  transition  from  the  old 
method  to  the  new.    The  first  stage  is  inflection  to  show 
everything.    The  main  part  of  Latin  is  in  this  stage. 
The  second  stage  is  inflection  and  a  separate  word. 
This  is  present  in  all  three  languages  in  some  degree ; 
in  Latin  least. 

The  third  stage  is  the  separate  word  without  the 
inflection :  the  inflection  becomes  needless  and  drops  off. 

You   can   almost   see   the dst   dropping   off 

"  lovedst. "    It  is  seldom  used.    It  will  be  gone  by  and  by. 
What  will  the  Present  Tense  of  "  love  "  be  some  day  ? 
I  love. 
Thou  love. 
He  love. 
We  love. 
You  love. 
They  love. 
It  has  travelled  a  long  way  towards  it  already. 
Again,  over  the  door  of  a  Norfolk  public-house  hangs 
the  sign  of  a  gate  with  this  legend  : — 

"  This  gate  hang  high,  but  hinder  none, 
Refresh  and  pay,  and  travel  on." 
Is  Norfolk  behind  the  times  or  before  them  ? 


70  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

We  have  already  added  two  extra  ideas  to  the  Verb — 
Time  and  Person. 

We  did  it  by  adding  two  inflections  to  the  stem. 

It  is  necessary  to  add  still  another,  that  of  the  mode 
or  manner  of  the  action.     (Mood  means  mode). 

We  should  call  it  nowadays  the  kind  of  the  action. 

Just  as  we  have  to  have  different  tense  forms  for 
adding  the  ideas  of  different  kinds  of  time,  so  we  need 
different  mood  forms  for  adding  the  ideas  of  different 
kinds  of  action. 

i.  The  usual  kind  of-  action,  the  one  we  most  com- 
monly want  to  talk  about,  is  the  one  which  actually 
has  happened  or  is  happening  or  will  happen. 

We  might  call  such  actions  "  fact  actions,"  and  the 
form  which  expresses  them  we  might  call  the  "  fact  " 
mood.     It  is  usually  called  the  Indicative  Mood. 


2.  All  actions  however  that  we  talk  about  do  not 
actually  happen. 

For  example  : 

"  If  I  were  to  go  I  should  see  him." 

The  going  does  not  actually  take  place  nor  is  there 
any  certainty  that  it  will :   (though  of  course  it  may). 

The  going  is  not  expressed  as  an  action  which  happens 
at  all.  It  may  or  may  not  happen  in  the  end,  but  we 
are  not  talking  about  that.  It  is  an  action  which  some- 
body has  thought  about,  or  figured  in  his  mind. 

Such  actions  we  might  call  "  thought-of  actions." 

The  mood  which  expresses  them  we  might  call  the 
"  thought  mood." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  JI 

The  usual  name  is  the  Subjunctive  Mood,  a  name 
given  to  it  owing  to  one  of  the  particular  uses  of  this 
mood  tool  which  you  will  learn  more  about  later. 


3.     Actions  again  may  need  to  have  attached  to  them 
the  idea  of  command. 

"  Go." 

"  Let  him  come." 

Such  actions  might  be  called  "  command  "  actions,  imperative 

and  the  mood  which  expresses  them  we  might  call  the  Command 
-,  „  A  Actions 

command      mood. 


The  usual  name  is  the  Imperative  Mood. 


It  is  clear  that  a  great  many  ideas  might  be  added 
to  the  Verb  in  this  way. 

For  example,  we  might  express  the  action  as  a  wish. 
"  I  wish  to  see  my  brother." 

Such  actions  might  be  called  "  wish  "  actions  and 
the  Mood  the  Wish  Mood. 

Greek  actually  has  a  Wish  Mood — the  Optative. 

Or  again,  we  might  have  "  Question  "  actions  and  a 
"  Question  "  Mood. 

Or  again,  "repeated"  actions  and  "repeated"  Mood, 
and  so  on. 

It  is  not  done,  because  the  ideas  can  be  expressed 
more  simply  in  other  ways.  We  can  find  simpler  tools 
than  such  forms. 


Infinitive 


72  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

4.  There  are  two  other  important  forms  of  the  verb 
which  we  generally  class  with  the  Mood  forms. 

They  are  called  the  Infinitive  Mood  and  the  Par- 
ticiples. 

They  are  like  Verbs,  because  they  express  action, 
but  they  are  quite  unlike  Verbs  in  the  work  they  do. 

The  Verb  describes  the  main  action,  and,  as  such, 
occupies  the  centre  of  the  sentence. 

Because,  however,  there  is  a  main  action  in  every 
a  Noun       sentence,  it  does  not  follow  that  there  cannot  there- 
fore be  other  actions  there  too. 

For  example  : 

"  To  eat  too  fast  will  give  you  a  pain." 

What  is  the  Verb  ?     "  Will  give." 

Nevertheless,  "  To  eat  too  fast  "  certainly  describes  an 
action. 

It  is  just  as  certainly  not  the  Verb. 

What  is  it  ?    It  is  the  name  of  an  action. 

Actions  themselves  are  often  the  Subjects  or  Objects 
of  sentences,  and,  as  such,  they  have  to  be  named, 
and  the  names,  like  all  other  names,  are  nouns. 

Such  Nouns  might  be  called  action  nouns. 

The  form  of  the  action  word,  (i.e.,  of  the  Verb)  that 
expresses  them,  might  be  called  the  noun  mood  of  the 
Verb. 

"  I  should  like  to  see  you  to-morrow." 
"  To  read  at  night  will  spoil  your  eyes." 
"  To  take  exercise  is  a  necessity." 

These  are  all  action  nouns,  Subjects  or  Objects  of 
the  sentences  they  belong  to. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  73 

Again,  examine  the  sentence  :  "To  read  at  night 
will  spoil  your  eyes." 

Can  you  express  this  in  any  other  way  ? 

"  Reading  at  night  will  spoil  your  eyes,"  Gerund 

And  similarly  :     "  Eating  too  fast  will  give  you  a  pain." 
Again  :     To  walk  is  good  for  you, 
and  Walking  is  good  for  you, 
clearly  mean  the  same  thing. 

This  new  form  is  called  the  Gerund — sometimes  the 
Verb  Noun. 

There  are  then  two  tools  for  expressing  noun  actions. 

First,  the  Noun  Mood  or  the  Infinitive  Mood. 

Secondly,  the  Gerund. 

Investigate  for  youselves  the  difference  between 
them.  They  are  not  quite  alike  in  their  use.  Write 
sentences  with  them  both  till  you  discover. 

If  you  are  learning  Latin  look  at  the  forms  called 
the  Supines.  Find  out  in  what  relation  they  stand 
to  the  Infinitive  Mood  and  what  work  they  do. 

The  name  "  Infinitive  Mood  "  which  is  the  usual 
name  for  this  Mood,  really  means  the  indefinite  mood. 

The  name  is  given  because  noun  actions  are  often 
indefinite  ones,  i.e.,  actions  which  do  not  refer  to  any 
particular  Subject  or  Object. 

Such  actions  may  fairly  be  called  indefinite  actions 
and  the  Mood  which  expresses  them  the  Indefinite  Mood. 

All  noun  actions,  however,  are  not  entirely  indefinite  : 
some  want  a  definite  receiver  of  the  action  mentioned  to 
complete  the  sense  in  the  same  way  as  ordinary  Verbs. 

For  example  : 

"  To  see  his  suffering  caused  me  great  pain." 


The 


74  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Again,  some  want  a  definite  doer  of  the  action 
mentioned. 

For  example  : 

"  For  Caesar  to  die  unavenged  would  be  a  shame. 

The  Noun  Mood  is  therefore  the  better  way  to  think 
of  it,  at  first. 


5.  Again,  just  as  action  describing  words  may 
occur  in  a  sentence  as  Nouns,  so  they  may  also  occur 
as  Adjectives. 

For  example  : 

"  Our  exhausting  labours  had  their  reward." 
Participles      Exhausting  is   certainly  not   the   Verb.     It   just   as 
(adjectives)  certainly  refers  to  an  action. 
Again : 

"  I  shall  always  remember  this  terrifying  spectacle." 
The  work  of  these  words  is  clearly  to  act  as  servants 
to  labours  and  spectacle,  i.e.,  it  is  adjectival  work. 

Participles  therefore,  like  infinitive  moods,  are  words 
which  express  actions  other  than  the  main  one  of  the 
sentence. 

As  Infinitives  are  action  nouns,  so  participles  are 
action  adjectives. 

Participles,  like  any  other  action  expressing  word, 
may  need  an  Object  to  complete  their  sense. 

What  about  the  doer  of  an  action  expressed  by  the 
participle  ?    How  is  that  indicated  ? 
To  summarise : 

Fact  actions  require  a  Fact  Mood — Indicative. 
Actions  which  are  thought  of  or  figured  require  a 
Thought  Mood — Subjunctive. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  75 

Command  actions  require  a  Command  Mood — Im- 
perative. 

Action  nouns  require  a  Noun  Mood — the  Infinitive. 

Action  Adjectives  require  an  Adjective  Mood — the 
Participle. 


So  far  we  have  been  speaking  simply  of  the  different    §16 
aspects  of  the  action  that  need  expression  by  Moods. 

We  shall  need  tools  for  each.  It  remains  to  see  what 
these  tools  are. 

These  different  ideas  could  be  of  course  added  by  Mood 
inflection.  Inflections 

On  the  other  hand  many  Verbs,  especially  in  Latin, 
have  already  added  two  ideas  by  inflection — person  and 
time — an  inflection  for  each. 

To  add  a  third  would  make  the  word  a  very  clumsy 
tool.  Three  inflections  on  one  stem  are  getting  too 
much.  The  word  would  be  all  inflections,  the  dog 
all  tail. 

Mood  inflection  when  it  is  added  is  done,  not  by  a 
separate  inflection,  but  by  a  changed  inflection,  that  is, 
by  a  separate  time  or  person  inflection  for  each  mood. 

Thus  hab  -  e  -  o  which  we  had  before,  really  means 
not  only  having,  "  present  time  "  and  /  but  having t 
"  action  is  really  happening  in  present  time,"  and  i"; 
on  the  other  hand  hab  -  e  -  am  means  having,  somebody 
has  thought  in  present  time  about  the  action,  and  /. 

In  English,  however,  the  mood  ideas  are  added  by 
separate  words. 

For   the  mood   work,  Latin,  as   you  would  expect, 


76 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


makes  free  use  of  inflections ;  French  has  some,  English 
none  at  all. 

Note  the  following  forms  : 
I  love.  \ 


I  loved. 

I  have  loved. 

I  had  loved. 

I  shall  love. 

I  shall  have  loved. 


All    these    express   fact 
\    actions  which   actually 
come  to  pass. 


I  may  love. 
I  might  love. 
I  may  have  loved. 
I  might  have  loved. 


All  these  express  the 
thought  of  an  action. 


"  Let  us  love  "  expresses. a  command  action. 
The   action  must  happen  in  the  future.     There  is 
no  choice  of  tenses. 


To  love. 

To  have  loved. 

To  be  about  to  love. 


All  these  are 
Action  Nouns. 


Loving. 
Having  loved. 
Being  about  to  love. 


All  these  are  Action 
Adjectives. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  77 

We  have  seen  so  far  that  Verbs  express  two  great     §17 
ideas — Actions — and  States.  Analysis  of 

Actions  always  imply  someone  to  do  them,  and  often  state 
one  or  more  people  to  receive  them. 

Associated  with  the  Verb  there  is  always  a  Subject 
and  often  a  direct  or  indirect  Object. 

It  is  now  necessary  to  look  a  little  closer  at  the 
State  Verbs. 

You  made  some  time  ago  various  lists  of  live  sentences 
in  which  you  marked  the  State  Verbs.  If  you  have  them 
turn  them  up.  If  not,  catch  twenty  more  sentences 
and  mark  them  as  before. 

Sift  out  the  action  sentences.       We  are  not   con-  Ex  22 
cerned  with  those  for  the  moment.     Look  at  those  that 
remain. 

The  first  thing  that  will  strike  you  is  the  constant 
recurrence  of  is  or  was  or  one  or  other  of  the  parts  of  the 
verb  to  be. 

"  The  boy  is  dirty." 

"  This  pudding  is  very  nice." 

Nine  out  of  ten  state  verbs  are  made  out  of  the  verb 
to  be. 

The  use  of  the  verb  is  to  give  the  idea  of  a  state.  That 
is  all  it  does,  however. 

If  we  say  : 

The  boy  is, 
The  pudding  is, 
we  get  no  sense. 

All  we  know  is  that  the  description  of  some  state  or 
other  has  been  begun.     The  Verb  is  incomplete. 

It  is  completed  by  another  word  which  follows,  des- 
cribing the  state. 


78         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  other  state  verbs  which  do  not  use  the  verb 
to  be,  are  nevertheless  built  on  exactly  the  same  principle 
as  the  above. 

They  have  a  word  first  which  gives  the  idea  of  state 
and  carries  the  inflection,  followed  by  another  word 
which  describes  the  state. 

"  He  seemed  cheerful." 

"  Caesar  became  a  General." 

"  He  got  too  fat." 

The  words  Seemed,  became,  got,  are  the  words  which 
probably  gave  you  difficulty  when  you  first  tried  to 
separate  action  verbs  from  state  verbs.  You  can 
generally  solve  such  difficulties  by  asking  "  Is  somebody 
doing  something?"  or  "Is  somebody  being  some- 
thing ?  " 

Again,  you  can  always  tell  state  verbs  by  their  always 
needing  a  describing  word  to  follow : 
He  seemed, 
Ccesar  became, 
He  got, 
mean  nothing. 

They  need,  if  they  are  to  make  sense  the  words  which 
follow  them,  i.e.,   Cheerful,  General,  Fat. 

All  state  verbs  are  like  this  both  in  English  and  French. 

Since  they  are  in  two  or  more  parts  they  are  called 
Compound  Verbs. 

The  work  that  these  second  parts  of  the  verb  do  is 
to  describe  the  state. 

As  it  is  necessarily  the  state  of  the  subject,  it  follows 
that  in  describing  it  they  must  also  describe  the  subject, 
i.e.,  that  they  do  adjectival  work  for  the  Subject. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  79 

The  word  General  cannot  describe  became,  without 
also  describing  Ccesar. 

It  makes  not  the  slightest  difference  that  the  words 
are  not  always  Adjectives.  Many  of  them  are  :  some 
are  originally  nouns :  some  are  originally  adverbs : 
but  they  are  one  and  all  doing  adjectival  work. 

A  steel  tool  which  by  turns  puts  in  screws  and  opens 
packing  cases  may  easily  be  called  a  screw-driver  at  one 
time  and  a  lever  at  another.  It  is  not  necessary  to 
quarrel  about  which  it  is. 

It  is  sensible  however,  if  you  find  it  opening  packing- 
cases  to  call  it  a  lever,  if  putting  in  screws,  a  screw- 
driver. Similarly  if  you  find  a  word  doing  adjectival 
work,  you  are  justified  in  treating  it  as  an  adjective. 


Standing  between  actions  and  states  and  the  ways    §18 
of  expressing  them,  is  an  alternative  way  of  expressing  Two 
certain  sorts  of  action  which  is  of  great  importance.      t^S?*®** 

In  the  ordinary  way  we  say  that  A  does  an  action 

.       t-,     .  i  *  n©  ACtlVO 

to  B,  the  receiver.  and  the 

We  may  equally  well  say  B  suffers  the  action  at  the  *!*?sive 

hands  of  A. 

We  may  regard  the  action  as  done  or  as  suffered  and 

we  can  describe  it  equally  well  in  either  way. 

Since  then  we  desire  sometimes  to  describe  the  action 

as  a  done  action,  we  have  as  usual  an  inflection,  or  a 


So  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

special  form,  of  the  verb  to  denote  this.     The  particular 
form  which  does  it  is  called  the  Active  Voice. 

Similarly  the  form  which  denotes  that  the  action  is 
a  suffered  action  we  call  the  Passive  Voice. 
Voice  is  thus  somewhat  akin  to  mood. 
Mood  adds  the  idea  of  the  kind  of  the  action. 
Voice  adds  the  idea  that  the  action  is  presented 
in  one  of  two  alternative  ways. 
It  is  clear  that  if  the  action  is  suffered,  someone  or 
something  must  suffer  it. 

This  someone  or  something,  as  before,  becomes  the 
subject  of  the  sentence. 

It  is  also  clear  that  the  sufferer  is  no  other  than 
the  person  of  whom  we  spoke  as  the  receiver  when  we 
were  speaking  of  the  action  in  the  active  way,  i.e.,  the 
person  who  is  the  Object  in  the  active  sentence  will 
become  the  Subject  of  the  Passive  sentence. 

Moreover  since  the  sufferer  of  the  action  is  the  receiver 
of  the  action,  if  there  is  no  receiver  there  can  be  no 
sufferer,  i.e.,  only  verbs  which  describe  actions  that 
pass  to  a  receiver  can  be  put  into  this  passive  form,  i.e., 
only  transitive  verbs  have  a  passive  voice. 

To  choose  a  passive  form  for  describing  an  action  brings 
the  receiver  rather  than  the  doer  into  the  position  of  the 
Subject  and  so  into  prominence. 

This  is  the  great  value  of  the  passive  form. 
For  example,  The  Emperor  of  the  French  after  1870, 
might  have  said  : — "  My  country  has  been  devastated, 
my  armies  have  been  vanquished,  my  provinces  taken 
from  me." 

If  he  had  had  no  passive  voice  he  would  have  to  have 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  8l 

said  : — "  The  Germans  have  devastated  my  country, 
they  hckve  vanquished  my  armies,  they  have  taken 
from  me  my  provinces."  The  Germans  in  such  circum- 
stances were  the  very  last  people  he  would  have  desired 
to  talk  about. 

In  the  same  way,  search  your  live  sentences  for  half-a- 
dozen  instances  in  which  nothing  but  the  passive  form 
will  say  what  you  want  to  say,  e.g.,  "  That  window  was 
broken  last  term." 


Such  a  language  as  Latin  will  add  the  idea  of  the  active     §19 
or  passive    aspect    of    the  action    through    inflection, 
having  one  set  of  moods,  tenses,  persons,  etc.,  all  de- 
noting done  actions,  another  different  set  all  denoting 
suffered  actions. 

French  and  English  make  no  attempt  at  inflection  for  Passive 
this  purpose.     They  both  do  it  by  the  method  described  In*lections 
above  for  state  verbs,  i.e.,  by  a  word  expressing  state, 
(the  verb  to  be)  which  carries  the  inflections,   (mood, 
tense,  and  so  on)  followed  by  a  word  describing  the  state. 

This  describing  word  is  one  of  the  participles,  and, 
as  before,  will  be  doing  adjectival  work  for  the  subject 
of  the  passive  sentence. 

A  Verb  in  the  passive  voice  is  thus  a  sort  of  state 
verb. 

Compare  : 

Amor,     a  typical  Latin  Passive  Tense. 

.      .     ,         f  The  French  and  English 

Je  suis  aime  ,     _          .     ° 

T          .       ,           1  forms — both  on  the  state 

I  am  loved  .        .     .  , 

*  verb  principle. 


82  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

§20        We  saw  when  investigating  state  verbs  that  they 
Compound  consisted  of  two  parts,  of  which  the  first  denoted  that  the 
Verbs;11        description  of  some  state  had  been  begun  :    the  second 
described  the  state  and  incidentally  the  person  in  it. 

Something  similar  happens  sometimes  among  action 
verbs.     The  description  of  an  action  is  begun,  but  the 
verb  is  not  complete  in  itself,  and  requires  another  word. 
e.g.,  Find  the  verb  in  the  following  sentences  : — 
"  They  pulled  the  house  down." 
"  He  called  his  dog  Nebuchadnezzar." 
"  He  shot  the  beast  dead." 
"  I  offered  the  shares  for  sale." 
"  Pulled  down,"    "  called  Nebuchadnezzar,"    "  shot 
dead,"    "  offered  for  sale," — are  the  verbs. 

The  main  work  that  these  second  parts  of  the  verb 
do  is  unquestionably  to  complete  the  verb. 

Incidentally  they  are  adjectival  to  the  Object  when 
one  is  present ;  exactly  as  the  second  parts  of  the  state 
verb  were  to  the  Subject. 

There  is  this  general  difference  between  such  verbs 
and  the  ordinary  state  verb — the  first  part  of  them 
means  more  and  carries  more  of  the  central  idea  than  the 
first  part  of  the  state  verb. 

Compare :      "He  hung  the  picture  up," 
and  :  "  The  picture  is  charming." 

As  to  the  adjectival  character  of  the  second  parts 
consider  : 

"  Caesar  me  certiorem  fecit,  se  Gallos  vicisse." 
The  main  work  of  certiorem  is  adverbial — to  amplify 
fecit — the  two  between  them  constitute  the  full  verb — 
but  it  also  describes  me. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  83 

"  He  knocked  the  policeman  down  " 
Down  amplifies  knocked,  but  it  also  describes  the  police- 
man. 

"  He  called  his  dog  Nebuchadnezzar." 
Nebuchadnezzar  is  a  necessary  complement  of  called,  but 
it  also  describes  the  dog. 

A  development  of  this  is  to  be  seen  in  some  of  the 
compound  tenses  of  the  Active  Voice. 

"  I  have  seen  my  friend/' 
Seen  completes  the  verb,  but    it    is    also    incidentally 
adjectival  to  friend. 

This  adjectival  function  often  gets  overshadowed  by 
the  adverbial  one,  but  it  is  there  all  the  same. 

"  I  have  done  my  work  "  is  only  a  variation  of 
"  I  have  my  work  done." 
"  I  have  my  work  ready." 
"  I  have  my  work  complete." 
Such  participles  are  always  adjectival  to  the  object, 
when  one  is  present. 


This  principle  is  a  complete  guide  to  the  use  of  the     §21 
French  Past  Participle  in  combination  with  avoir. 

The  verb  in  such  cases  is  an  Action  Verb  ;    and  the 
participle  is  adjectival  to  the  object. 

It  is  accordingly  attached  to  it  by  the  usual  agree- 
ment. 

In  the  case,  however,  in  which  the  object  follows  the 
participle,  a  conflict  of  duties  arises  : 

"  J'ai    ecrites    mes    lettres,"    is    logically    correct  : 


84  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

'*  Ecrites  "  as  a  part  of  the  verb  has  to  stand  in  close 
combination  with  "  ai." 

As  an  adjective  it  has  no  business  in  front  of  "  lettres." 

Hence  the  least  important  side  of  its  work  (the  ad- 
jectival side)  gives  way — the  agreement  drops,  and  the 
sentence  becomes  "  J'ai  ecrit  mes  lettres." 

Compare  : 

"  I  have  cornered  the  enemy."  (The  verb  character 
of  the  participle  is  prominent,  as  shown  by  position.) 

"  I  have  the  enemy  cornered."  (The  adjective 
character  is  prominent,  shown  the  same  way. 


CHAPTER    III. 
ADJECTIVES    AND    ADVERBS. 

We  have  seen  that  the  sentence  consists  of  Subjects, 
Verbs,  Objects,  and  their  servants. 

We  have  dealt  so  far  with  the  kings.  We  are  now 
coming  to  the  servants. 

Two  principles  emerge  : 

(i)    It  is  necessary  for  the  sense  that  it  should  be     §1 
quite  plain  to  which  masters  the  respective  servants 
belong. 

Consider : 

"  The  baron  killed  the  soldier,  brave,  bold,  bad."       Attach- 
ment 
Did  it  serve  him  right  ? 

What  does  it  mean  ?  That  there  was  butchery  of 
some  sort : — very  little  else  till  the  adjectives  have  been 
properly  placed. 

Servants  have  to  be  attached  to  their  masters  ;  these 
Adjectives  are  not  so  attached ;   that  is  the  trouble. 

Make  the  sentence  into  sense  and  watch  what  you  do. 

You  put  the  adjective  next  door  to  the  noun  it  be- 
longs to. 

What  for  ?    To  show  that  it  belongs  to  that  noun. 

What  principle  do  we  use  ?    That  of  ORDER. 

When  did  you  use  it  before  ?  To  mark  the  Subjects 
and  Objects. 

Latin  following  the  inflection  principle,  makes  case 
endings  do  this  work. 

Not  only  does  a  Latin  adjective  wear  the  same  case 
as  its  master,  but  also  the  same  gender. 

85 


86  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Each  adjective,  therefore,  has  three  inflections  in 
each  case,  one  for  use  with  the  masculine  noun,  one 
with  the  feminine,  one  with  the  neuter. 

Similarly  it  wears  the  number  of  the  noun. 

Look  at  its  declension  in  your  Grammar. 

This  imitation  of  the  noun  is  called  AGREEMENT. 
Bon  -  us  dominus,  means  bon  -  (attached  to)  domin  - 
(who  is  doing  something). 

In  French  we  find  a  similar  correspondence  but  less 
of  it :  nouns  in  French  have  no  cases,  hence  the  ad- 
jectives which  follow  them  have  no  cases. 

Nouns  in  French  have  genders  however,  hence  the 
adjectives  which  belong  to  them  have  genders  inflec- 
tions to  match. 

The  nouns  have  numbers,  and  the  adjectives  which 
belong  to  them  have  accordingly  number  inflections  to 
match. 

In  English,  though  nouns  have  gender  inflections  and 
number  inflections,  adjectives  do  not  follow  the  noun 
by  wearing  corresponding  inflections,  but  are  attached 
to  the  noun  solely  by  their  position. 

In  all  the  languages  the  necessary  thing  for  the  sense 
is  to  connect  the  adjective  with  its  master. 


In  the  same  way  the  Adverb  has  to  be  connected  with 
the  word  it  works  for,  generally  a  verb. 

This  connection  is  a  great  deal  more  easily  made 
than  the  last. 

There  are  often  two  or  three  words  in  a  sentence 
that  may  be  a  loose  adjective's  masters.  There  is  doubt. 
It  has  to  be  guarded  against. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  8j 

There  is  only  one  verb  in  a  sentence,  however,  and 
it  is  generally  plain  from  the  meaning  that  the  Adverb 
is  working  for  that,  and  not  for  some  stray  adjective 
or  adverb. 

No  agreement  is  necessary  because  there  is  practically 
no  doubt. 

No  amount  of  alteration  of  the  position  of  the  Adverb 
can  spoil  the  sense  of : 

"  He  will  arrive  soon," 
although  it  may  alter  the  sentence  in  other  ways  ;   on 
the  other  hand  alter  the  place  of  the  adjectives  in  : 

"  The  brave  baron  killed  the  bold,  bad  soldier," 
and  see  what  happens. 

Similarly  neither  Latin  nor  French  adverbs  need  any 
agreement. 

While,  however,  adverbs  do  not  need  such  rigorous 
attachment  to  their  masters  as  adjectives,  they  naturally 
need  some,  and  the  attachment  is  done  in  all  languages 
by  their  place. 

Adverbs  working  for  a  verb  are  generally  in  close 
proximity  to  it  in  a  sentence. 

Adverbs  working  for  an  adjective  or  other  adverb 
are  always  next  door  to  it. 


2.    The  second  principle  is  that  adjectives  and  adverbs     §2 
are  servants.  Subordina- 


tion 


88  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

As  such  they  are  required  to  take  a  back  seat  in  the 
sentence. 

Their  business  is  to  introduce  their  masters,  to  assist 
their  masters,  not  to  draw  attention  off  their  masters, 
nor  to  usurp  the  place  of  honour  in  the  sentence,  nor 
to  claim  from  the  listener  or  reader  the  attention  that 
belongs  to  kings  of  the  sentence. 

What  is  the  matter  with  the  German  Emperor's 
remark  ? 

"  My   late,   never-to-be-forgotten,  always 
wise  and  far-seeing  grandfather  used  to 
say.     ....;." 
Poor  old  grandfather,  staggering  under  the  weight  of 
his  adjectives. 
Or  again : 

14  I  yesterday  in  the  mud  down  fell." 
The  adverbs  have  got  the  middle  of  the  stage,  which 
properly  belongs  to  the  verb. 

This  principle  appears  in  various  ways, 
(i).    Nouns  in  any  language  may  not  be  overloaded 
with  adjectives. 

My  dear  old,  fat,  white-haired,  benevolent 
friend  came  to  see  me  this  morning." 
If  for  any  reason  it  is  necessary  to  attach  so  many 
adjectives,  some  of  them  must  be  taken  away  from  the 
front. 

"  My  dear  old  friend,  who  is  both  fat,  white-haired 
and  benevolent,  came  to  see  me  this  morning." 
Or  better  still : 

"  My  dear  old  friend  came  to  see  me  this 
morning ;   he  is  as  fat,  white-haired,  and 
benevolent  as  ever." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  89 

Note  how  only  the  smallest  and  most  unobtrusive 
adjectives  are  left,  dear,  old. 

The  field  must  be  left  clear  for  the  noun. 


(2).    French  dislikes  adjectives  before  the  noun  at  all. 

It  allows  a  few  short  ones,  such  as  bon,  mauvais,  jeune, 
vieux,  petit,  grand.  It  is  partly,  because  they,  as  it 
were,  coalesce  with  the  noun.  Compare  I  often  see 
him,  in  English,  where  often  see  is  really  the  verb. 

French  also  allows,  if  they  are  not  long,  a  few  intro- 
ductory ones,  i.e.,  adjectives  which  suggest  the  Noun 
and  do  not  distract  attention  by  carrying  a  meaning 
foreign  to  that  suggested  by  the  noun,  e.g.,  Sur  le  penchant 
de  quelque  agreable  colline  faurai  une  petite  maison. 
Why  can  you  say  :  une  verte  prairie, 
but  not :     un  vert  pre  ? 
or  again  :    une  flatteuse  esperance, 
but  not :     un  flatteur  espoir  ? 


(3).  There  are  certain  parts  of  the  sentence  which 
are  practically  forbidden  ground  for  the  adverb. 

They  are  those  parts  where  the  Subject,  Verb  and 
Object  are  at  work. 

The  stage  must  be  left  clear  when  these  three  words 
come  on  it. 

They  do  the  work  of  expressing  the  main  idea  of  the 
sentence. 

When  once  that  work  is  begun,  subordinate  words  of 
any  kind  are  better  out  of  the  way  until  it  is  finished. 


90  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Adverbs  have  no  business,  for  example,  at  the  critical 
point  of  the  whole  sentence,  between  the  Subject  and  the 
Verb. 

"  I  yesterday  saw  him." 
"  He  at  10  o'clock  arrived." 
A  few  odd  ones  are  allowed  in. 
"  I  often  see  him." 
14  He  never  came." 
The  real  reason  is  they  are  not  doing  the  usual  sub- 
ordinate adverb  work,  but  form  essential  parts  of  the 
verbs. 

Often  see,  —  Never  came, 
are  the  real  assertions. 

French  never  allows  an  adverb  of  any  sort  in  this 
position. 

Note  this  and  take  care.  The  few  English  exceptions 
there  are  will  mislead  you. 

Adverbs  can  go  in  front  of  everything  if  you  desire 
to  emphasise  the  idea  they  express,  or  they  can  go  in 
various  places  after  the  verb,  according  to  circumstances. 


These  placing  principles  are  naturally  more  impor- 
tant in  English  and  French,  which  depend  so  largely 
on  the  placing  of  the  words  to  give  intelligibility  to  the 
sentence,  than  in  Latin,  which  depends  on  inflections. 

To  disturb  the  place  of  a  subject  in  English,  strikes 
at  the  sense  of  the  whole  sentence. 

Nothing  can  do  that  in  Latin,  except  to  omit  inflections 
or  to  put  on  wrong  ones,  as  people  have  been  known 
to  do. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  91 

Care  has  especially  to  be  taken  with  both  adjective 
and  adverb  sentences. 

If  it  is  dangerous  to  let  adjectives  and  adverbs  get 
out  of  hand,  it  is  far  more  so  to  let  adjective  or  adverb 
sentences  do  so,  because  they  are  so  much  bigger  and 
heavier  then  single  words,  and,  misplaced,  will  do  so 
much  more  mischief  to  the  clearness  of  the  sentence. 

The  main  difficulty  with  them  is  that  they  suspend 
the  action  of  the  sentence. 

The  long  adjective  sentence,  for  example,  will  get 
between  the  Subject  and  the  Verb,  where  adverbs  are 
forbidden  to  go.  The  subject  is  mentioned  and  then 
the  key  of  the  sentence  withheld.  You  will  learn  more 
about  these  dangers  and  the  way  they  are  met,  later 
on. 


CHAPTER    TV. 
CLASSIFICATION. 

In  the  course  of  an  examination  of  the  tools  of  ex- 
pression that  we  have  in  daily  use,  we  have  seen  that 
there  are  certain  great  sets  of  words — Verbs,  Nouns, 
Pronouns, — each  of  which  does  a  certain  well-defined 
part  of  the  work  of  expression. 

The  first  necessity  was  to  distinguish  these  sets  one 
from  the  other. 

The  words  in  each  set,  however,  are  not  always  pre- 
cisely alike  among  themselves. 

Some  verbs,  for  example,  express  action,  others  state ; 
that  is  to  say,  we  have  two  sorts  of  verb  tools,  just  as 
a  carpenter  may  have  two  kinds  of  saw,  a  tenort  saw 
and  a  panel  saw.     Each  kind  is  for  a  separate  purpose. 

We  want  names  for  these  different  kinds. 

The  names  you  give  do  not  matter  much,  so  long  as 
they  indicate,  as  they  ought  to  do,  the  special  work 
the  tools  are  for. 

We  have  appropriately  called  such  verbs  "  state  verbs  " 
and  "  action  verbs." 

Again,  among  the  "  action  verbs  "  we  have  "  action 
done  "  verbs  and  "  action  suffered  "  verbs. 

These  are  appropriately  named  active  verbs  and 
passive  verbs. 

Again,  among  the  active  verbs,  with  some  the  action 
passes  to  one  or  more  receivers  ;  with  others  the  action 
does  not  pass. 

92 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  93 

We  needed  names  for  these  verbs.  We  called  them 
"  action  passing  "  verbs,  and  "  non-action  passing  " 
verbs,  or  again,  Transitive  and  Intransitive  Verbs. 

Classification  of  this  sort  has  to  go  on  in  nearly  every 
set  of  our  word  tools,  and  you  must  learn  to  do  it  for 
yourself. 

The  principle  is  the  same  everywhere,  We  have  Method  of 
to  watch  what  work  a  particular  kind  of  word  is  doing  Ciassiflea- 
and  to  label  it  accordingly. 

For  example  :    NOUNS.     Here  are  twenty  Nouns  : 
Warmth,  Hydrogen,  Book,  Courage,  Smith,  Elephant, 
Cloak,  Impulse,  Sound,  Man,  Growth,  Length,  Blackness, 
Speed,  Wing,  Trifle,  Postcard,  Wheat,  John,  Africa. 

Arrange  them  in   classes  :    form  as  many  classes  as  Ex.  23 
seem  desirable. 

Class  No.  1,  are  names  of      .     .     .     ? 
Class  No.  2,  are  the  names  of  ...     ? 
Class  No.  3,  are  the  names  of  ...     ? 
Find  names  accordingly  for  the  classes. 
Compare  with  the  usual  names  of  such  classes. 

Again,  ADVERBS. 

Here  are  a  score  of  Adverbs,  Ex.  24 

When,  to-morrow,  nicely,  here,  fast,  how,  shortly, 
well,  soon,  by  heart,  why,  at  ten,  fitly,  strenuously, 
for  a  week,  at  home,  out  of  wantonness,  very,  too, 
somewhat,     greatly,     quite. 

Arrange  them  as  before  in  classes. 

Class  No.  1  adds  to  the  verb  the  idea  of    ...     ? 

Class  No.  2  adds  to  the  verb  the  idea  of     ...     ? 
and  so  on. 


94  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Find  names  for  the  classes  accordingly. 

Find  other  members  of  each  class. 

Find  adverbs  which  come  in  none  of  the  above  classes. 

Classify  these. 

Verify  your  work  by  comparison  with  the  usual 
divisions  of  adverbs. 

If  any  of  these  adverbs  puzzle  you,  write  them  in  a 
sentence  and  think  about  them  there.     Study  them  alive. 

Collect  adverbs  from  your  live  sentences  and  classify 
them  in  the  same  way. 

§2         Again,  PRONOUNS. 

Pronouns  need  careful  classification. 

In  dealing  with  them,  especially  in  a  foreign  language, 

the    beginner    always   has   this    difficulty ;     the   same 

words  at  one  time  are  pronouns,  at  another  adjectives  ; 

at  one  time  they  are  one  sort  of  tool  and  at  another, 

another. 

Tne  For  example  : 

distinction  "  He  lives  in  this  house." 

between  „.,  .    .  ,.       . 

Pronouns        This  is  an  adjective. 

and  "  He  has  done  this." 

Adjectives       ~7  .    • 

This  is  a  pronoun. 

Again,  the  word  that  does  at  least  four  different  sorts 

of  work  in  the  following  sentences  : 

i.     "  Where  is  that  house  you  spoke  of  ?  " 

2.  "  Why  have  you  done  that  ?  " 

3.  "I  lost  the  pencil  that  I  bought." 

4.  "He  told  me  that  he  could  not  come." 
This  use  of  a  word  tool  for  three  or  four  different 

purposes  is  by  no  means  uncommon.     It  is  not  to  be 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  95 

wondered  at.  Does  the  owner  of  a  hammer  never  use 
it  for  anything  but  knocking  in  nails  ? 

It  is  essential,  therefore,  that  before  attempting  to 
classify  pronouns,  you  understand  adjective  and 
pronoun  work. 

An  adjective's  business  is  to  help  the  noun :  the 
pronoun's  to  replace  it. 

When  the  adjective  is  there,  the  noun  is  present. 

When  the  pronoun  is  there,  the  noun  is  not. 

It  is  true  that  when  an  adjective  is  at  work  the 
noun  is  sometimes  left  out. 

(a)  "  Good  people  are  happy," 
may  be  expressed  as  : 

(b)  "  The  good  are  happy." 

It  is  only,  however,  because  the  word  people  is  under- 
stood without  being  said.  If  it  were  not  so,  it  would 
have  to  be  said. 

"  Good  salmon  are  scarce." 

Leave  out  salmon  and  see  what  happens. 

Adjectives,  therefore,  with  obvious  nouns  following, 
tend  to  lose  them.  The  obvious  noun  gets  omitted,  and 
the  adjective  has  to  do  the  whole  work  of  both  words. 

Such  a  word  as  good  therefore  in  (b)  can  be  des- 
cribed perfectly  rightly  in  two  ways. 

First,  as  an  adjective  serving  the  word  people,  which 
is  understood  with  it. 

Second,  as  a  noun.  An  adjectival  noun  would  be  a 
good  name  for  it. 

You  can  see  from  such  an  example  how  the  same 
words  may  come  to  do  the  work  of  different  parts  of 
speech. 


96  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  word  good,  by  a  perfectly  natural  process,  here 
does,  first  the  work  of  an  adjective,  then  that  of  a  noun. 

It  is  our  old  friend  the  screwdriver  acting  as  a  lever. 
It  would  be  absurd  to  dispute  about  its  name. 

Remember,  however,  that  any  tool  which  acts  as  a 
lever  follows  the  laws  of  the  lever.  Similarly  any  word 
which  acts  as  an  adjective  or  as  a  pronoun  follows  the 
laws  of  the  adjective  or  of  the  pronoun. 


§3         We  next  have  to  classify  pronouns. 

The  first  step  in  classification  is  always  to  make 
a  collection.  Make  a  list  containing  every  pronoun  you 
can  find. 
Personal  Split  it  up  into  separate  classes  as  before. 
Pronouns  £  Your  first  set  will  probably  be  the  set  you  have 
seen  attached  to  the  verb.  "I,"  "he,"  "we,"  and 
similar  words.     We  call  them  personal  pronouns. 

You   are   familiar   with    the     idea   of   the   different 
persons  or  things  who  may  do  the  action  of  the  verb. 

These   pronouns   replace   the   nouns   which   are   the 
names  of  these  persons  ;  the  name  is  therefore  a  perfectly 
natural  one. 
Ex.  25  1.     Write  in  a  column  the   English  Personal  Pro- 

nouns I.     1.  I.     2.  Thou.      3.  He,     she,      it.     4.  We. 
5.  You.       6.  They. 

Write  in  a  parallel  column  their  French  equivalents, 
and  in  a  third  parallel  column  their  Latin  equivalents. 
Ex.  26  2.     Write  in  parallel  columns  the  English,   French 

and  Latin  declensions  of  "  I." 

Do  the  same  for  the  other  pronouns,  especially  for  the 
third  person,  which  is  in  common  use. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  97 

Do  not  however,  attempt  this  form  of  exercise  till 
you  are  thoroughly  familiar  with  the  declensions  them- 
selves and  can  use  them  to  express  yourself  with.  The 
simple  comparison  in  No.  i  you  can  do  at  an  early 
stage. 

3.     Make  from  your  French  grammar  a  list  of  the     EXt  2~ 
French   conjunctive   personal   pronouns.     Catch   some 
sentences  from  your  French  reading  book  which  contain 
them.     Examine  these  sentences  and  discover  for  your- 
selves the  use  of  this  particular  set  of  pronoun  tools. 

Do  the  same  for  the  disjunctive  pronouns.  Do  not 
attempt  this  exercise  too  soon. 

What  is  the  use  of  having  two  sets  ? 


2.     Connected  with  the  personal  pronoun  is  another    §4 
set  which  you  should  also  have  discovered — Himself, 
Myself,    Ourselves,  etc. 

In  the  course  of  using  the  personal  pronouns,  it  may 
happen  that  one  of  them,  besides  being  the  Subject, 
may  occur  again  in  some  other  capacity  in  the  sentence, 
generally  as  the  direct  or  indirect  Object. 

If  we  had  nothing  but  personal  pronouns  available 
we  should  have  to  express  such  forms  as  follows  : 
"  I  hurt  me," 
"  We  said  to  us." 
"  You  said  to  you." 
G 


98  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Is  there  any  reason  why  such  forms  should  not  be  used  ? 

Not  the  least.     They  are  quite  plain. 

French,  which  never  wastes  energy  in  needless  forms, 
employs  them  exactly  as  they  stand. 

Among  them,  however,  there  are  some  which  are  not 
clear. 

"  He  hurt  him." 
The  Who  is  "  him  "  ?   The  original  "  he  "  or  someone  else? 

Prtots    »  is  obscure. 

"  She  said  to  her," 

The  sentence  is  obscure  again. 

Examine  as  many  such  forms  as  you  can  think  of. 

The  obscurity  always  occurs  in  the  third  person  and 
only  there. 

It  is  remedied  in  Latin  and  French  by  the  use  of  a 
special  pronoun  for  the  third  personal  pronoun  the 
second  time  it  occurs. 

This  pronoun  is  "  Se  "  in  both  languages  and  of  course 
always  refers  to  the  Subject. 

Find  out  for  yourself  why  "  Se  "  has  no  nominative 
in  Latin  or  in  French  :  why  the  Dative  and  Accusative 
cases  are  the  only  cases  of  "  Se  "  in  French  and  the  main 
cases  of  "  Se  "  in  Latin. 

As  the  same  obscurity  exists  in  English,  how  is  it 
prevented  ? 

We,  too,  have  a  special  group  of  pronouns,  himself, 
herself,  etc. 

In  English,  however,  we  not  only  insert  these  pronouns 
in  the  third  person,  where  obscurity  exists,  but  in  the 
first  and  second,  where  it  does  not. 

We  have  thus  the  set  yourself,    thyself,    myself. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  99 

We  need  a  name  for  these.  They  are  pronouns  that 
are  used  to  denote  the  Subject  on  its  second  appearance 
in  the  sentence. 

As  far  as  the  third  person  is  concerned  and  the  original 
use  of  the  pronouns—"  Doubt  stopping  Pronouns " 
would  be  a  good  name. 

They  do  stop  doubt  in  the  third  person,  and  are  used 
•uselessly  in  the  first  and  second. 

The  general  name  is  Reflexive  Pronouns,  i.e.,  pronouns 
which  denote  that  the  action  is  reflected  back  again 
on  to  the  Subject  instead  of  proceeding  to  a  separate 
Object. 

An  action  is  not  always  reflected  back,  however,  e.g. : 
"  He  gave  me  a  seat  near  himself." 

There  is,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  no  name  which  com- 
pletely describes  all  they  do.  Second-time-subject 
Pronouns  would  describe  them  in  English,  but  would 
not  be  appropriate  for  the  other  languages. 

Note  again  : 

"  He  will  come  himself  " 
"  He  hurt  himself." 

The  himself  in  the  first  sentence  is  a  totally  different 
pronoun  from  the  one  in  the  second. 

Number  2  is  one  of  these  of  which  we  have  just  been 
speaking,  reflexive  or  doubt  stopping. 

The  first  himself  neither  denotes  that  an  action  is 
reflected  nor  stops  doubt.  It  is  doing  totally  different 
work:  it  emphasises.  It  is  properly  therefore  called 
an  emphatic  pronoun. 

Something  might  be  said  for  calling  it  an  emphatic 
adjective. 


100         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Whether  regarded  as  a  pronoun  or  as  an  adjective,  it 
is  doing  adjectival  work  for  he. 


§5        Related  again  to  the  Personal  Pronouns  are  the  two 
sets  of  Possessive  Pronouns  and  Possessive  Adjectives. 

All  that  is  necessary  with  regard  to  these  words  is 
to  know  the  adjectives  from  the  pronouns. 
Possessive  is  an  excellent  name  for  them. 


§,6        Another  kind  of  pronoun  tool  we  use  in  the  Demon- 
strative or  Pointing  Pronoun. 

We  use  it  naturally  when  we  want  to  point. 
Akin  to  these  are  the   Demonstrative  or  Pointing 
Adjectives. 

The  words  this  and  that  are  the  words  most  generally 
used  in  both  classes. 

Can  you  think  of  any  more  ?     "  The." 

The  points.  It  points  less  vigorously  than  this  or 
that,  but  it  points. 

"  The  bird  is  a  crow/' 
is  not  so  forcible  as : 

"  That  bird  is  a  crow," 
but  all  the  same  it  directs  your  attention  to  a  particular 
bird,  exactly  as  "that  bird  "  does. 

The  is  therefore  a  demonstrative  or  pointing  adjective. 

It  is  used  so  freely  however,  that  it  is  almost  a  part 
of  the  noun  it  belongs  to,  i.e.,  the  bird  may  be  regarded 
as  one  noun,  rather  than  as  a  noun  served  by  an  adjective. 

Again,  examine  : 

"  I  cannot  go,  but  he  can." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  10 1 

What  is  he  ?    Personal  pronoun  ? 

No.     Pointing  pronoun. 

Don't  you  see  the  speaker's  finger  go  out  ? 

Compare  : 

"  He  can't  come."     Emphasis  on  can't. 
He  personal  pronoun. 

"  He  can't  come."     Emphasis  on  he. 
He  demonstrative  pronoun. 


As  a  further  illustration  of  suitable  methods   study      §7 
the  following.     Classify  as  Pronouns  or  Adjectives  the 
French  pointing  words. 
They  are  all  founded  on  the  word  "  ce." 
i.     What  does  "  ce  "  do  ?  Pointing  Adjective  work. 

It  denotes  "  this"  or  "that." 
Donnez  moi  ce  livre    Give  me  "this  "  or  "that" 
book. 

(according   to    the  circum- 
stances). 
2.     Does  it  do  any  pronoun  work  ?  Its  neuter  does — 

"  that  thing  "   or 
"  this  thing." 
C'est  dommage.     Qu'estc*?  que  c'est,  etc. 
Tout  ce  que  je  vous  ai  dit  est  vrai.     All  "  that  thing  " 
which  I  have  told  you  is  true. 

These  two  uses  are  all  the  Pronoun  uses  of  "  ce." 
The  other  words  now  fall  into  their  classes. 
Ce  -  la      That  thing  there.     What  is  ce  ? 

A  pronoun.     What  is  the  whole  word  ? 
A  pure  pointing  pronoun. 
Don't  use  it  as  an  adjective. 


102  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Ce  -  ci      Similarly. 

Ce  -  lui    That  -  lui.     What  is  ce  ? 

A  pointing  adjective.     What  is  lui  ? 
Disjunctive  Personal  Pronoun.     What  is  the 
whole  word  ?    A  pure  pointing  pronoun. 
Similarly  Celle     Cetteelle-        —that  lady. 

Ceux     Ces  eux  — those  persons. 

Ce  -  lui  -  la    That  gentleman  there. 
Ce-lui-ci    This  gentleman  here,  i.e.,  the  nearest,  i.e., 
in  some  cases  the  nearest  to  my  mind,  i.e., 
the  last  spoken  of,  the  latter. 
The  words  seem  mostly  pronouns.     Are  there  ad- 
jectives enough  ? 

We  use  ci  and  la  with  the  adjective  ce  when  we 
want  them. 

Cet  homme  -  ci. 
Ce  livre  -  la. 
28  Classify  the  Latin  pointing  words.     Make  up  your 

mind  clearly.     (1)  What  Pronoun  tools  are  available 
for  pointing. 

(2)  What  adjective  tools  there  are  ;  and  more 
especially  which  are  pure  adjectives  and  which  are  pure 
pronouns. 


§8         In  precisely  the  same  way  that  there  are  in  every 
language  sets  of  adjectives  and  pronouns  whose  business 
it  is  to  point,  so  there  are  sets  of  adjectives  and  pronouns 
whose  business  it  is  to  ask  questions. 
Write  down  twenty  questions. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  103 

Pick  out  the  sentences  with  question  asking  pronouns. 
Pick  out  the  sentences  with  question  asking  adjectives. 
Incidentally  study  the  tools  that  are  used  for  question 
asking. 

They  will  be  found  to  be  :  Questions 

1.  Order. 

2.  Special    question    asking  words,  the    ad- 

jectives   and    pronouns    above,    with 
certain  adverbs. 

The  main  question  asking  pronouns  will  be  found 
to  be  :  who,  which,  what : 

"  Who  is  there  ?  " 
"  Which  have  you  chosen  ?  " 
"  What  did  you  see  ?  " 
The  main  question  asking  adjectives  are  which,   what, 
"  Which  chair  did  you  buy  ?  " 
"  To  what  country  do  you  refer  ?  " 
Take  the  English  question  asking  pronouns.  Ex.  29 

1st.     Decline  them  where  possible,  i.e.,  make  a  list 

of  their  cases. 
2nd.    Place  by  the  side  of  them  the  French  pronouns 
which  do  the  same  work. 
Take  care  that  the  words  are  really  pronouns.     We  are 
not  talking  about  the  question  asking  adjectives. 

Set  by  the  side  of  the  scanty  English  declension  the 
fuller  French  declension. 

Do  the  same  for  the  Latin  question  asking  pronouns. 
Make  a  similar  table  for  the  three  sets  of  question 
asking  adjectives. 
This  exercise,  like  all  other  comparative  ones,  except 


104         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

the  simplest,  is  to  be  done  after  you  have  become 
familiar  with  the  matter  you  are  comparing  :  not  while 
you  are  learning  it  for  the  first  time. 


§9         What  sort  of  pronouns  have  we  had  ? 

The  Personal — Possessive — Reflexive — Question  asking. 

Relatives    Any    more  ?     Yes      Wordg    Jike    <<  who  „       „  whkh  „ 

"  that." 

Look  at  this  sentence  : 

"  The  soldiers  who  saw  the  enemy  took  cover." 
"  The  book  that  you  gave  me  was  extremely  in- 
teresting." 
"  The  horse  on  which  I  was  riding  fell  down." 
Do  you  notice  anything  about  the  italicised  sentences  ? 
They  are  all  replacing  sentences. 
You  would  suspect,  therefore,  that  the  first  character- 
istic of  this  kind  of  pronoun  is  that  it  works  in  a  re- 
placing sentence. 

What  kind  ol  a  replacing  sentence  ? 
Do  you  remember  any  other  word  that  works  only  in 
a  replacing  phrase  ? 

Make  a  dozen  sentences  with  who,  which,  and  that  as 
pronouns. 
Examine  them. 

Label   who,    which,    and   that  wherever   they   occur, 
according  to  the  work  they  are  doing. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  105 

Are  there  any  sentences  in  which  the  words  are  neither 
question  asking  nor  pointing  pronouns  ? 

What  are  such  sentences  ? 

You  will  find  they  are  always  replacing    sentences. 

Such  a  replacing  sentence  always  implies  a  main 
sentence  before  it,  and  the  pronoun  clearly  refers 
to  some  person  or  thing  mentioned  in  the  main 
sentence. 

There  is  more  than  that,  however. 

Consider  the  sentence  : 

"  The  soldiers,  who  had  seen  the  enemy,  took  cover.' * 

The  point  is,  what  work  is  who  doing  ? 

To  investigate,  try  to  say  the  sentence  without  it. 

"  The  soldiers  took  cover,  for  they  had  seen  the  enemy." 

We  have  had  to  take  two  tools — for  and  they — to  do 
the  work,  a  Conjunction  and  a  Personal  Pronoun. 
"  The  book  that  you  gave  me  was  useless." 

Say  this  without  the  pronoun  that. 

"  The  book  was  useless  and  you  gave  it  me." 

We  have  had  again  to  take  two  tools  and  and  it,  a 
Conjunction  and  a  Personal  Pronoun. 

The  conclusion  clearly  reached  is  that  who  does  two 
words'  work,  (i)  that  of  a  Conjunction,  (2)  that  of  a 
Personal  Pronoun  referring  to  a  word  in  the  previous 
sentence. 

The  proper  account  therefore  of  who  and  of  other 
words  like  it  is  this ;  they  are  pronouns  which  are  used 
only  in  replacing  sentences ;  they  refer  to  some  person  or 
thing  spoken  of  in  the  principal  sentence  and  at  the 
same  time  join  the  replacing  sentence  to  the  principal 
sentence. 


106         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  name  usually  given  is  that  of  Relative  Pronouns, 

because  they  relate,  i.e.,  carry  the  mind  back  to  the 

person  or  thing  which  has  gone  before — the  antecedent. 

The  name  does  not  express  their  conjunction  character 

at  all. 

Such  words  are  wanted  in  all  languages. 
Here  are  a  few  examples  : 

"  My  brother,  who  sailed  for  India  yesterday, 

will  not  be  back  for  ten  years." 
"  The  story  that  he  tells  is  extraordinary." 
"  The  elephant  accepted  the  bun  which  I  offered 
him." 


§10         The  Relative  pronoun  clearly  has  work  to  do  in  its 
own    sentence. 

It  will  be  Subject  or  Object  or  anything  else  it  is 
wanted  for. 

It  is  obviously  necessary  for  the  sense  of    its  own 

sentence  that  its  case  should  correspond  with  its  work  ; 

that  is  to  say  the  ease  of  a  relative  pronoun  is  a  matter 

which  has  to  do  entirely  with  its  own  sentence. 

Relative         It  is  equally  necessary  for  the  sake  of  the  sense  of  the 

Construe-    whole  that  ^  snould  be  quite  clear  to  wnat  tne  relative 

refers. 

It  is  attached,  therefore,  to  its  antecedent  in  an  in- 
flected language  by  a  gender  and  number  agreement, 

just  as  an  adjective  is  attached  to  the  noun  it  belongs  to. 

It  is  interesting  to  observe  what  happens  in  English. 

The  sense  of   the  relative  sentence  has  to  be  made 
clear,  also  that  of  the  whole  just  as  before. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  107 

In  the  relative  sentence  when  who  is  the  Subject,  it  can 
at  the  same  time  mark  the  Subject  by  standing  first, 
and  at  the  same  time  be  near  enough  to  its  antecedent 
to  be  properly  attached  to  it  by  proximity,  our  English 
method  of  attachment. 

"  /  saw  the  villain,  who  slew  his  grand- 
mother." 

When  the  relative  is  the  Object,  however,  to  place  it 
after  the  verb,  in  the  usual  way,  means  tearing  it  from 
its  antecedent. 

To  mark  the  Object  by  order  is  therefore  impractic- 
able ;  hence  the  survival  of  the  case  ending  whom  and  the 
occurrence  of  the  Object,  fortified  by  the  case  ending, 
in  a  highly  unusual  position  at  the  beginning  of  the 
sentence. 

"  I  saw  the  villain  whom  the  policeman  had  just 
arrested." 

It  is  exactly  the  same  in  French. 

Work  out  the  application  of  the  principle  for  your- 
self. 


The  relative's  attachment  to  its  antecedent  will  also 
repay  study 

In  Latin  the  connection  is  marked  by  a  number  and 
gender  agreement  and  also  by  proximity.  The  two 
between  them  suffice, 

In  English  the  number  and  gender  inflection  is  gone  ; 
proximity  alone  has  to  suffice  ;  but  there  is  a  certain 
endeavour  to  get  an  agreement  (always  for  the  same 
purpose,  viz.  :    that  of  making  it  plain  to  which  noun 


108         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

the    relative    refers)    by    the   use   of  three   relatives : 
who  for  persons, 
which  for  animals, 
that  for  things. 
It  is  true  that  the  three  words,  except  who  and  which 
are  somewhat  interchangeable,  but  the  above  principle 
underlies  their  use. 

In  French  the  same  thing  happens,  except  that  there 
are  only  two  words,  qui  and  lequel,  and  that  lequel  carries 
number  and  gender  inflections,  which  make  it  a  certain 
tool  for  making  the  connection  when  other  means  fail. 
Ex.  30  Tabulate  the  Relatives  and  their  declensions  in  the 

three  languages. 


§11        What. — The  word  what  has  a  great  many  characters. 
Those  of  question  asking  adjective  and  question  ask- 
ing pronoun  have  already  been  noticed. 
Compound      Examine  : 

Relatives  "  Tell  me  what  will  happen." 

It  is  clearly  equivalent  to  : 

"  Tell  me  that  which  will  happen." 
It  is  in  this  case  equivalent  to  a  relative  and  the  neuter 
demonstrative  pronoun,  its  antecedent. 

French  uses  ce  qui  for  it,  showing  them  both. 
It  is  a  double  word. 

The  proper  name  for  it  is  a  compound  relative. 
Do  you  know  another  ? 
Whoever,  in  certain  senses  equals  he  who. 
When,  in  certain  senses  is  a  double  word. 
"  Tell  me  when  you  are  coming." 
i.e.,  "  Tell  me  the  time  at  which  you  are  coming." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  109 

Similarly  where  and  how. 
In  other  uses  these  are  not  double  words. 
Collect  examples  of  each  of  these  words  from  your 
live  sentences. 

Classify  the  uses  of  when,  where,  how. 


CHAPTER  V. 

AGREEMENT  AND  GOVERNMENT. 

§1         Certain  words  are  said  to  agree  with  certain  other 

Agreement  words,  that  is  to  say  they  carry  corresponding  inflections. 

We  have  s'een  that  an  adjective's  inflections  are  made 

to  correspond  with  the  noun's  in  order  to  attach  the 

adjective  to  that  particular  noun. 

This  is  necessary  for  the  sense,  and  the  same  work 
is  done  in  English  by  order. 

It  is  clearly  a  misuse  of  terms  to  speak  of  agreement 
when  inflections  are  not  present. 

English  adjectives,  for  example,  do  not  agree  with 
their  nouns. 

They  belong  to  them,  and  the  attachment  is  shewn 
by  order,  not  agreement. 

In  many  sentences  nouns  do  adjective  work,  i.e.,  they 
extend  the  meaning  of  another  noun,  by  saying  some- 
thing for  it  that  it  does  not  say  for  itself. 

"  My  brother  the  soldier  returned  yesterday." 
The  soldier  is  doing  adjective  work. 
Compare  : 

"  My  soldier  brother  returned  yesterday." 
As  an  adjective  the  inflections  of  soldier  are  made  to 
agree  with  those  of  brother :   in  Latin  two  nominative 
cases. 
Again  : 

"  I  saw  my  brother,  the  soldier." 
Two  accusative  cases. 

no 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  III 

Again  : 

"  Caesar  was  a  great  General." 
As  was  made  plain  earlier,  a  great  General  describes 
the  state,  and  in  doing  so  perforce  describes  the  man 
who  was  in  it. 

It  is  adjectival  to  Caesar,  therefore  takes  the  same 
inflections. 
Similarly  : 

"  Artaxerxes  became  king" 
"  My  friend  was  called  John" 
"  He  seemed  ill." 
This  agreement  of  one  noun  with  another  to  which  it  is 
giving  adjectival  help  is  called  "  Apposition  "  and  might 
be  called  common-sense. 


Verbs  are  sometimes  said  to  agree  with  their  Sub- 
jects. 

They  agree  in  this  way.  The  inflections  of  the  verb 
shew  the  number  and  person  of  the  Subject. 

So  do  those  of  the  word  expressing  the  Subject 
itself. 

Number  and  Person  are  shown  twice,  and  as  long 
as  both  words  are  inflected  it  is  impossible  that  their 
inflections  should  be  different.  Any  difference  would 
confuse  the  sense. 

To  mark  them  on  the  Subject  and  also  on  the  Verb  is, 
however,  unnecessary,  at  least  in  most  cases. 

They  are  accordingly  dropping  off  the  verb. 

This  agreement  or  correspondence  when  it  exists  is  an 


112         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

accident,  due  to  the  inflection  of  the  verb  and  the  in- 
flection of  the  subject  doing  the  same  work. 

It  is  not  an  instrument  of  expression  like  the  agree- 
ment of  the  adjective  with  the  noun  it  serves. 


Again  :  there  are  certain  words  which  in  practice  are 
always  associated  with  other  words  bearing  particular 
inflections. 

For  example,  a  Latin  transitive  verb  will  always  be 
associated  with  some  Object  in  the  Accusative  case. 

The  particular  action  implies  a  receiver  and  the 
receiver  is  marked  by  the  accusative  inflection. 

This  association  is  often  described  as  a  government  of 
the  Object  by  the  Verb. 

No  more  pernicious  description  was  ever  invented 
by  grammarians. 

Nothing  can  govern,  that  is  to  say  dictate,  the  choice  of 
any  inflection  tool  except  the  work  that  it  is  wanted  for. 

The  term  govern  suggests  that  the  presence  of  the 
accusative  inflection  is  due,  not  to  the  fact  that  it  is 
the  appropriate  tool  for  its  particular  work,  but  to  some 
mysterious  action  of  one  of  its  fellow  tools — the  verb. 

A  transitive  verb  implies  an  accusative  case  and  a 
hammer  implies  a  nail. 

It  is  about  as  sensible  to  say  that  the  verb  governs 
the  accusative  as  that  the  hammer  governs  the  nail. 

The  verb  and  the  case  are  fellow  tools  both  chosen 
for  their  fitness  and  for  nothing  else. 

The  proper  account  of  "  Gallos  "  in  "  Caesar  Gallos 
vicit,"  is  not  "  accusative  case  "  governed  by  the  verb 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  113 

"  vicit,"  but  that  is  the  Object  of  the  action  and  has  the 
inflection  which  says  so. 

When,  therefore,  it  is  said  that  one  word  governs 
another,  what  is  really  meant,  and  all  that  is  meant  is, 
that,  in  practice,  when  the  first  word  has  been  used  a 
particular  inflection  of  the  second  will  be  found  at  its 
heels. 

The  two  forms  occur  together.  The  first  does  not 
appear  without  the  second,  but  the  first  is  in  no  way  the 
reason  of  the  second. 

You  will  find  in  most  Latin  grammars  lists  of  verbs 
which  govern  the  dative,  or  the  genitive,  or  two  accusa- 
tives. 

This  means  that  after  those  verbs  the  dative,  or  the 
genitive,  or  two  accusatives  occur. 

If  you  have  a  spark  of  intelligent  curiosity  you  will 
not  be  content  with  this  information,  but -will  proceed 
to  enquire  what  those  datives  or  genitives  are  doing 
there. 

It  is  the  same  thing  with  French  constructions. 

For  example  : 

"  Je  lui  pardonnai." 

What  case  is  "  lui  "  ? 

Dative. 

Why? 

Because  pardonner  takes  a  after  it,  which  is  the 
same  thing  as  saying  it  takes  a  dative. 

That  is  no  reason.     Look  again. 
What    does    the    dative    generally   show  ?     Indirect 
object. 
H 


114         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Make  an  English  sentence  with  pardon. 

"  I  pardoned  him  his  offence." 
What  are  the  words  doing  ? 

Offence  — direct  object. 
Him       — indirect  object. 
What  is  the  proper  account  of  lui  ?     Indirect  object. 
Where  is  the  direct  ?     Understood. 
Learn  to  understand  about  the  word  pardonner  and 
then  get  rid  of  all  rules  about  it. 

If  a  following  word  requires  a  "  dative  "  choose  it 
yourself,  intelligently.  You,  not  pardonner,  are  the 
master  of  the  tool. 

The  general  account  of  all  so-called  governing  con- 
structions is  this :  a  word — the  verb  is  a  typical  one — 
has  a  meaning  which  is  not  complete  in  itself  and  re- 
quires, before  the  whole  work  of  expression  is  done, 
certain  other  ideas  to  complete  it. 

Some  verbs,  for  example,  require  one  Object,  others 
a  direct  and  an  indirect  Object,  others  two  direct  Ob- 
jects; others  again  will  need  additional  adverbial  ideas. 
"  I  broke  the  window." 
"  I  gave  him  sixpence." 
"  I  taught  the  boy  Latin." 
"  I  am  afraid  of  lions." 
These  ideas  involve  nouns  and  pronouns  in  various 
cases  to  express  them.     In  what  cases  depends  entirely 
upon  the  ideas  to  be  expressed. 

Hence  the  train  of  thought  started  by  a  particular 
word  always  ends  in  the  employment  of  a  particular  case. 
The  word    implies  would   be   a    better  word    than 
governs. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  1 15 

To  say  the  word  implies  the  Dative  case  is  not  only 
a  more  correct  way  of  stating  the  facts,  but  starts  some 
very  pertinent  questions  as  to  how  it  implies  that  case. 

You  will  no  doubt  find  certain  cases  in  which  it  is  not 
clear  how  a  particular  word  comes  to  be  followed  by 
another  in  a  particular  case. 

"  Taedet  me  vitae." 

Why  "  Vitae  ?  "     You  may  suspect  a  causal  genitive. 
"  I  am  weary  because  of  life." 
or  give  some  similar  explanation.     It  is  theory  only, 
and  may  be  good  or  bad.    (See  p.  211.) 

What  is  true,  however,  is  that  there  is  a  reason  for 
the  inflection  somewhere.  No  one  ever  yet  used 
meaningless  speech  or  meaningless  inflections  habitually. 
An  expression,  like  a  building,  may  be  changed  and 
altered  in  the  course  of  centuries  till  its  original  form 
is  almost  lost ;  nevertheless  there  was  a  plan  once  ; 
that  it  is  hard  to  see  now  is  not  a  reason  against  looking 
for  it. 


There  is  another  form  of  so-called  government   to     §3 
which  the  term  is  even  more  inappropriate,  namely,  the 
cases  that  follow  prepositions. 

Examine  :  The  Gov 

"  The  boy's  hat,"  ernment  of 

"  The  hat  of  the  boy."  tiolf81" 


Il6         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

It  is  clear  from  such  forms  and  from  many  others 
that  might  be  quoted,  that  the  prepositions  replace 
the  case  inflections  ;  that  they  represent  man's  tendency 
to  express  himself,  not  synthetically,  as  it  is  called,  but 
analytically,  i.e.,  not  by  one  word  added  to  and  in- 
flected, but  by  separate  words. 

We  have  therefore  in  such  forms  as  "In  hortum  " 
simply  a  stage  in  the  transition. 

"  Hortum  "  was  the  first  stage  when  the  idea  of 
"  motion  into  "  was  represented  simply  by  a  case  ending. 

"  In  hortum,"  was  the  second,  when  the  case  tools 
proved  insufficient  to  do  the  work  of  expressing  the 
dozens  of  ideas  we  now  represent  by  prepositions,  and 
special  words  for  the  purpose  were  fashioned. 

"  In  hort,"  would  be  the  third  and  final  stage. 

It  is  at  this  stage  that  English  practice  has  arrived. 

Our  only  examples  of  prepositions  followed  by  a  case 
are  among  the  pronouns. 

We  still  use  "  to  him  "  "of  them,"  but  even  here  the 
case  endings,  though  usual,  are  quite  unnecessary. 

Note  too  that  the  only  noun  case  ending  we  have — 
the  possessive — is  not  used  with  a  preposition,  but  is 
alternative  to  it. 

We  say, 

"  The  man's  hat," 

"  The  hat  of  the  man." 

We  do  not  say, 

"The  hat  of  the  man's." 

The  correspondence  between  a  certain  group  of  pre- 
positions and  a  certain  case  is  in  no  way  due  to  any 
mysterious  action  of  the  preposition.     It  is  accidental. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  117 

It  tends  to  disappear.  It  has  practically  disappeared 
in  both  French  and  English. 

It  is  because  the  group  of  prepositions  and  the  case 
are  doing  the  same  work  twice  over. 

The  case  is  needless,  but  as  long  as  it  is  there  it  is 
impossible  for  it  to  be  other  than  one  which  originally 
added  the  same  general  idea  as  the  group  of  prepositions. 
Any  difference  between  the  case  meaning  and  the  pre- 
position meaning  would  confuse  the  sense. 

It  is  an  exactly  similar  correspondence  to  the  one  we 
have  in  "  Je  parle  "  ;  the  separate  word  has  begun  to 
supplant  the  inflection,  but  the  inflection  has  not  yet 
gone. 

Hence  the  key  to  the  prepositions  and  the  cases  which 
occur  after  them  is  to  be  found  in  the  study  of  the  cases. 

Given,  for  example,  the  main  ideas  expressed  by  the 
Ablative  case,  the  prepositions  which  express  those  ideas 
in  various  forms,  will  be  the  ones  which,  when  the  Abla- 
tive Case  broke  down,  were  brought  into  service,  first 
with  the  case  and  ultimately  instead  of  it :  so  too  for 
the  other  cases. 

The  proper  account  of  "  urbe  "  in  "  Evadit  ex  urbe," 
is  not  Ablative  Case  governed  by  "  ex  "  but  Ablative 
Case  associated  with  "  ex/'  a  preposition  of  the  same 
general  signification  as  the  case. 


CHAPTER    VI. 


PARSING. 

To  parse  a  word  is  to  give  account  of  the  work  it  is 
doing  in  the  sentence,  as  shown  either  by  inflection,  or  by 
the  substitutes  of  inflection,  or  by  its  position,  adding 
any  appropriate  information  as  to  its  classification  and 
main  inflections. 

For  example.  Parse  the  words  in  the  sentence,  "  He 
broke  the  window  by  throwing  stones." 


He 


broke 


the 

window 

by  throw- 
ing 


stones." 


Pronoun,  personal,  showing  by  position  and 
inflection  that  it  is  the  Subject  of  the 
sentence.  It  is  the  third  person  and  de- 
notes one  only. 

A  verb.  Inflection  and  meaning  show  a 
perfect  action  which  happened.  It  is  a 
verb  of  action  and  passes  its  action  on.  Its 
principal  parts  are  break,  broke,  broken. 
A  pointing  adjective  serving  "  window,"  at- 
tached to  it  by  position. 
A  noun.  Position  shows  it  to  be  the  Object 
of  the  action. 

A  combination  of  preposition  and  a  verbal 
noun. 

The  phrase  includes  an  object   "  stones  " 

and  is  equivalent  to  an  adverb  ;     it  serves 

the  word  broke. 

A  noun.     Its  position  shows  it  to  be  the 
Object  of  the  action  expressed  by  "throwing." 
Its  inflection  shows  more  than  one. 
118 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  Iig 

The  word  "  parsing  "  is  sometimes  applied,  especially     §2 
in  connection  with  the  more  inflected  languages,  to  the 
much  more  mechanical  process  of  cataloguing  a  word's 
inflections. 

For  example,  to  parse  "  militibus  "    in  the  sentence 
"  Rex  dedit  pecuniam  militibus." 
we  may  proceed  as  follows  : 

Militibus :  Noun,  Common,  Third  Dec,  Miles.   Militis — 
Plural,  Masculine,  Dative — following  "  dedit." 

Such  an  exercise  will  give  you  familiarity  with  the 
forms  and  their  names  (which  is  desirable  enough  some- 
times), but  it  will  do  no  more. 

It  has  further  this  great  danger  ;  that  you  may  learn 
the  name  of  the  form  and  stop  short  of  the  only  thing 
that  really  matters,  viz.  :  the  meaning  of  the  form.  To 
know  a  name  is  not  necessarily  to  know  the  thing.  You 
have  not  accounted  for  "  militibus  "  when  you  have 
said  "  Dative  Case  following  dedit  or  governed  by 
dedit  "  :  you  have  only  named  the  inflection.  You 
only  really  account  for  "  militibus  "  when  you  say  it 
expresses  the  fact  that  the  "  milites  "  were  the  in- 
direct recipients  of  the  action  of  "  dedit." 

In  other  words  it  is  futile  to  name  a  form  if  you  know 
nothing  of  its  force  ;   and  still  more  so  to  use  it. 

You  can  no  more  talk  sense  with  inflection  forms  that 
are  meaningless  to  you  than  you  can  with  words  that 
are  meaningless. 

You  may  succeed,  with  the  help  of  a  multitude  of 
rules  (inflection  A  always  follows  inflection  B,  and  so 
on),  in  imitating  correctly  the  speech  of  the  original 
users   of  the   forms.     They,   however,   used  them   in- 


120         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

telligently.     Your  success  will  be  simply  that  of  a  highly 
developed  parrot. 

It  follows  that  parsing  on  anything  but  the  catalogue 
principle  must  be  restricted  at  first  to  the  simpler  forms 
which  will  be  the  only  ones  you  really  possess. 

You  cannot,  for  example,  parse  a  Subjunctive  Tense 
form  properly  till  you  have  learnt  both  what  the  Mood 
is  for  and  what  the  Tense  is  for. 

Many  of  the  Cases  which  you  will  meet  with  you  will 
not  be  able  to  account  for  till  you  have  studied  Case 
carefully.  Don't  be  misled  into  thinking  your  work 
begins  and  ends  with  names. 

To  understand  the  uselessness  of  mere  names,  consider 
the  following  conversation  : 

Passenger.  Can  you  tell  me  what  that  curious 
arrangement  of  ropes  and  pulleys  is  for  ? 

Boatman.  That,  Sir !  That's  the  purchase  of  the 
peak  halyard. 

Passenger.  Ah  !  of  course.  How  stupid  of  me  I 
And  what's  the  peak  halyard  ? 

Boatman.  Peak  halyard,  Sir  !  Why  that's  what  we 
always  bend  on  the  gaff,  Sir. 

Passenger  has  a  vague  feeling  that  he  ought  to  know 
all  about  it  but  somehow  doesn't. 

The  following  sentence  will  give  you  some  idea  of 
what  parts  of  the  work  are  within  your  reach,  and  what 
parts  require  further  knowledge  : 

Helvetii  -  Noun,  Proper,  Masc,  2nd  Dec.  Its  in- 
flection shows  a  number  of  persons 
who  are  the  doers  of  the  action  ex- 
pressed by  "dixere." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  121 

Ccesari  -  Noun,  Proper,  Masc,  3rd  Dec.  Singular 
by  nature.  Its  Dative  inflection  shows 
that  Caesar  is  the  indirect  receiver  of 
the  action  expressed  by  "  dixere." 

dixere       -  Verb,  Trans.,     3rd    Conj.     Dico    Dixi 

Dictum  Dicere.      Its  inflections  show 

a    complete     action    which     actually 

happened  in  past  time  ;    and  that  there 

were  more  doers  than  one,  viz.  :     the 

Helvetii. 

Sibi  esse  in  animo) 

iter  'per  provinciam  [  Object  of  "dixere." 

facere.  J 

For  further  parsing  in  this  sentence, 
the  Object  must  be  subdivided  and 
after  that  again  the  parts  of  the 
Object. 

Esse  in  animo.  A  verb  :  expressing  a  state.  Sum  Fui 
Esse — in  animo  :  or  better,  Est  Fuit 
Esse  in  animo.  Infinitive  or  Noun 
Mood  denotes  a  present  state  (strictly 
the  thought  of  a  present  state).  As  a 
Noun  it  forms  with  its  complement 
"  sibi "  and  its  subject  "  iter  per 
provinciam  facere  "  the  object  of  the 
action  expressed  by  "  dixere." 

in  animo.  An    indispensable    adverbial    comple- 

ment of  esse.  Both  the  preposition 
and  the  ablative  case  express  the  idea 
"  where."     (See  oh.  xiii.) 


122         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Sibi.  A  reflexive  pronoun  referring  to  the 

same  persons  as  "  Helvetii,"  already 
described.  Its  Dative  inflection  ex- 
presses the  fact  that  these  persons  are 
indirectly  interested  in  the  "  esse  in 
animo." 

Iter  per  provinciam  facet e.     Subject  of  "  esse  in  animo." 

Facere.  A  verb  :    expressing  an  action,  which 

passes,  3rd  Conj.  Facio  Feci  Factum 
Facere.  Noun  Mood  denoting  an 
action  (strictly  the  thought  of  an 
action)  in  Present  time ;  with  its  com- 
plements "  iter  "  and  "  per  provinciam  V 
it  is  the  subject  of  "  esse  in  animo." 

Per  provinciam.    An    adverbial    complement    of    "  iter 
facere";  the  preposition  and  the  accusa- 
tive case  both  express  the  idea  of  the 
"  where  to  "  of  the  action.     Compare  : 
"  He  drove  the  bradawl  through  the  board," 
"  He  pushed  his  stick  into  the  sand."  (See  ch.  xiii.) 

Iter.  Object  of  "  facere  " — etc. 

These  examples  are  not  given  you  for  exact  imitation. 

You  are  not  meant  to  imitate  but  to  think. 

Scrutinise  each  word  or  phrase  or  replacing  sentence  : 

make  up  your  mind  what  each  is  doing  ;   in  the  case  of 

inflected  words,  what  each  inflection  is  saying. 

When  you  have  found  this  out,  put  it  down  plainly. 

Any  form,  or  any  grouping  of  words  is  justifiable  which 

makes  for  this  plainness.     Use  as  few  inflection  names 

as  possible. 

You    will    see   where   the   difficulties   come   above. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  123 

"  Sibi  "  "In  animo  "  "  Per  provinciam  "  were  all 
difficult  to  account  for :  so  will  all  such  forms  be  till 
you  have  studied  the  different  meanings  that  the  various 
forms  of  Case  convey. 

Do  not  in  any  case  slur  over  the  difficulty  by  such  a 
description  as  "  Accusative  governed  by  per." 

All  that  this  means  is  that  when  the  Romans  said 
"  per  "  they  said  an  Accusative  directly  after  it. 

So  no  doubt  they  did — and  so  no  doubt  may  you  do  ; 
but  if  Providence  had  intended  you  for  a  parrot  you 
would  have  been  furnished  with  claws  and  a  tail. 

In  the  same  way  the  full  account  of  the  Infinitives 
"  esse  in  animo  "  and  "  facere  "  needs  a  further  study 
of  the  Infinitive. 


CHAPTER    VII. 

ANALYSIS. 

§1  Every  sentence  of  whatever  apparent  length  has  a 
single  framework  consisting  of  Subject,  Verb,  and  in 
certain  cases  Objects. 

This  part  of  the  sentence  is  indispensable. 

The  rest  of  the  sentence  consists  simply  of  elements 
subordinate  to  these,  either  of  an  adjective  nature 
assisting  the  Subjects  and  Objects,  or  of  an  adverb 
nature  assisting  the  verb. 

This  second  part  of  the  sentence  adds  fulness,  but  is  not 
indispensable. 

In  other  words,  there  are  in  the  sentence,  at  most, 
three  kings  and  their  servants  :  nothing  more  except 
the  connections  needed  to  link  the  whole  together. 

i.  Now,  if  the  sentence  consisted,  as  it  might,  of  the 
bare  framework,  and  had  no  luxuries  in  the  shape  of 
adjectives  or  adverbs,  it  would  be  as  simple  and  clear 
as  possible,  but  bare. 

"  I  broke  the  window." 

2.  Assuming  again  that  appropriate  assisting  words 
are  added  in  the  shape  of  single  word  adjectives  or 
adverbs,  fulness  is  gained  but  simplicity  is  sacrificed 
a  little. 

"  I  broke  the  classroom  window  to-day." 

It  has  already  been  explained  how  even  single  word 
servants  in  the  wrong  places  can  do  mischief  to  the  main 
object  of  the  sentence,  which  is  to  express  something 
clearly.     For  example,  in  the  sentence  : 

124 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  125 

u  I  to-day  broke  the  classroom  window.*' 
To-day  is  out  of  place. 

3.  A  further  stage  in  the  process  is  to  add  any  or  all 
of  the  servant  elements  by  means  of  phrases  instead  of 
by  single  words. 

Prepositions  are  used  solely  in  the  manufacture  of 
such  phrases. 

Completeness  grows,  but  the  non-essential  part  be- 
comes larger  and  needs  more  care  in  handling. 

Up  to  now  the  sentences  are  such  as  you  use  yourself 
for  everyday  purposes. 
"  I  broke  the  window  in  the  classroom  this  afternoon.' ' 

Note  how  the  long  adjective  in  the  classroom  has  been 
removed  from  the  front  of  "  window." 

4.  The  next  stage  of  complexity  is  that  in  which 
auxiliary  or  replacing  sentences  are  introduced. 

Not  only  the  servant  elements  but  parts  of  the  frame- 
work may  be  replaced  by  such  sentences. 

The  possibilities  of  obscurity  are  increased  enormously 
at  this  stage,  in  two  ways  : — 

(a)  We  have  said  that  parts  of  the  framework  (the 
Object  for  example)  may  consist  of  a  sentence. 
This  in  itself  slows,  as  it  were,  the  main  action. 
The  presentation  of  the  essential  part,  instead 
being  quick  and  crisp,  becomes  fuller,  but  at 
the  same  time  heavier  and  more  cumbrous. 
What  it  gains  in  fulness  it  loses  in  clearness 
and  vigour. 

(b)  There  may  also  be  three  or  four  replacing 
servant  sentences.  The  full  sentence  may 
then  consist  of  the  original  framework  with 


126         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

replacing  sentences  as  integral  parts,  and 
various  servants,  also  expressed  by  replacing 
sentences. 

The  clearness  of  the  sentence,  and  so  its  value  as  a 
tool  of  expression,  suffers  both  ways.  The  impression 
left  on  the  mind  by  the  central  and  essential  part  is 
blurred  ;  on  the  other  hand,  the  presence  of  such  a 
mass  of  servant  sentences  impairs  its  chance  of  getting 
the  attention  and  prominence  that  are  its  due. 

The  penalty  of  all  this  is  confusion.  No  one  knows 
what  the  sentence  is  about. 

.  The  remedy  is  simple.  When  you  write  or  speak  at 
such  length  (which,  by  the  way,  it  is  to  be  hoped  is  not 
often)  : — 

i.  Take  the  utmost  care  of  the  essential  part  of 
your  sentence,  i.e.,  the  part  embodied  in  the  Subject, 
Verb  and  Objects. 

Be  cautious  how  you  use  replacing  sentences  for  any 
of  these  elements. 

It  is  often  necessary  to  do  so.  Such  a  tool  as  a  re- 
placing sentence  would  not  be  there,  unless  it  were 
wanted  ;  nevertheless  bear  in  mind  that  every  replacing 
sentence  you  use  here,  takes  the  point  off  the  main  thing 
you  want  to  say. 

2.  '  Watch  the  arrangement  also.  The  main  assertion, 
whether  embodied  in  single  words,  or  in  single  words 
and  replacing  sentences,  must  get  a  clear  field. 

Keep  servants,  especially  servant  replacing  sen- 
tences, as  far  as  possible  out  of  the  middle  of  it.  Put 
them  at  the  end  (as  is  chiefly  done),  or  at  the  beginning. 
Do  not  place  some  at  the  beginning  and  some  at  the  end 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  127 

If  you  do  this,  you  begin  the  impression  on  the  mind  with 
a  servant  idea  and  end  with  a  servant  idea.  The  main 
idea  will  never  get  properly  impressed. 

3.  Further— Minimise  in  every  possible  way  the 
length,  the  number,  and  the  weight  of  your  replacing 
servant  sentences. 

They  are  servants  only.  If  you  do  not  take  care,  they 
will  obliterate  from  your  hearer  or  your  reader's  mind 
the  very  idea  you  are  striving  to  implant  in  it — that  of 
the  main  sentence.  You  will  have  killed  it  with  ex- 
planations. 

To  minimise  the  servant  elements  in  length  and  number, 
use  phrases  rather  than  sentences,  and  words  rather  than 
phrases ;  when  in  doubt  cut  them  out  altogether. 

To  minimise  them  in  weight,  keep  out  from  among 
them  weighty  or  important  ideas.  Nothing  but  servant 
ideas  ought  to  go  in  servant  sentences.  Put  anything 
other  than  this  into  a  separate  main  sentence  of  its  own. 


Before  we  proceed  to  examine  the  application  of  these 
principles,  note  the  presence  in  some  sentences  of  a 
refinement  of  a  replacing  sentence,  namely,  sentences 
dependent  on  a  replacing  sentence. 

We  spoke  of  the  kings  and  the  servants  in  a  sentence. 
A  king  may  have  a  duke  to  represent  him  abroad. 
A  duke  may  have  a  secretary  to  write  his  letters :  the 
secretary  may  have  a  boy  to  run  his  errands. 

In  precisely  the  same  way,  am'  sentence,  which  itself 
depends  on  the  main  sentence,  may  have  a  sentence  de- 
pending on  it ;  and  there  may  be  again  another  depend- 
ing on  that,  and  so  on. 


128         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

As  the  poet  says  : — 

"  And  even  fleas  have  little  fleas, 
Upon  their  backs  to  bite  'em, 
And  little  fleas  have  lesser  fleas, 
And  so  ad  infinitum." 
It  is  clear  that  as  far  as  the  above  principles  are  con- 
cerned, a  servant  sentence  with  a  dependent  can  do  as 
much  mischief  as  two  servant  sentences  ;  or,  again,  that 
a  replacing  object  sentence  with  a  dependent  would 
take  the  point  off  the  main  assertion  even  more  than  a 
simple  replacing  sentence. 

It  appears,  therefore,  that  such  sentences  are  rather 
dangerous  tools  to  use,  and  that  great  skill  is  needed  to 
avoid  obscurity.  "  The  House  that  Jack  built,"  you 
will  remember,  was  constructed  with  them. 


§2        The  next  thing  that  you  have  to  do,  is  to  learn  to 
recognise   with   certainty   these   different  parts   of  the 
sentence. 
To  assist  you,  analyse  first  your  own  speech.    You  will 

find  it  much  simpler  than  anything  we  have  been  talking 
about.  You  have  already  begun  the  process  when  you 
learnt  about  replacing  sentences,  and  it  should  not  take 
you  long. 

To  analyse  means  to  sort  out,  in  every  sentence  you 
say,  the  different  elements,  the  kings  and  the  servants. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         129 

Do  not  invent  sentences  for  this  work — if  you  do,  you 
will  probably  write  stuff  quite  unlike  your  ordinary 
speech — bat  take  matter  you  actually  use.  "  There  is 
no  mustard  in  this  pot,"  and  so  on.  Begin  now  to  take 
a  keen  interest  in  your  own  speech,  and  in  what  it  is 
made  of. 

The  form  in  which  the  necessary  distinctions  will  best 
be  shown,  will  depend  on  the  sentences  you  are  analysing. 

Whatever  the  form  you  adopt,  in  no  case  destroy  the 
order  of  a  sentence.  Order  means  something.  To 
destroy  it  is  as  bad  as  omitting  words. 

It  will  be  well  to  denote  some  attention,  in  the  first 
instance,  to  comparatively  simple  sentences  and  a  study 
of  the  framework. 

In  ordinary  short  sentences  the  Subjects,  Verbs  and 
Objects  will  be  quite  apparent,  and  will  not  need  separate 
labels.  In  such  sentences  the  analysis  will  generally 
be  perfectly  clear,  if  you  write  the  words  composing  the 
framework  in  black,  and  the  non-essential  parts  in  red. 
Write  suitable  labels  above  when  there  is  any  doubt. 

For  example  : 

Adj.  Sent. 
"  Have  you  done  that  exercise  he  set  us  yesterday." 

Adv.  Ph. 
"  No,  I  did  not  have  time  last  night." 
"  Well,  perhaps  he  won't  say  anything.     He  is  in  a 
good  temper  this  morning." 

"  How  do  you  know  ?  " 
Adv.  Ph. 
i(  You  can  tell  by  his  eye." 

On  the  other  hand,  you  will  sometimes  meet  with 
sentences  in  which  the  recognition  of  the  Subject,  Verb 
I 


130         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

and  Object  demand  considerable  thought.    For  example  : 
"  Whose  is  the  next  study  ?  " 
"It  is  not  a  good  light." 
"  It  will  soon  be  time  to  get  up." 
"  There  is  a  cow  in  that  field." 
"  What  time  is  it  ?  " 
Such  sentences  will  need  re-writing  if  the  distinctions 
are  to  be  properly  shown. 

"  Whose  is  the  next  study  ?  "    —The  next  study  (Sub- 
ject) is  whose  (Verb), 
u  It  is  not  a  good  light  ":  —The   light    (Subject) 

is  not  good  (Verb), 
"  It  will  soon  be  time  to  get  up  "  — Getting      up     time 

(Subject),     will     be 
soon  (Verb) 
or  alternatively  :  — Soon    (Subject)    will 

be  getting  up  time, 
and  so  on. 


§3         A  further  question  which  will  constantly  arise  is — 

Essential    what  words  ought  to  be  included  in  the  Verb  ?     For 

SSfct    example>  h°w  are  we  to  treat  not  in  the  sentence  :    "  It 

the  Verb     is  not  a  good  light  ?  "     The  word  taken  alone  is  an 

Adverb,  and  therefore  in  one  sense  a  servant.     As  far  as 

its  work  is  concerned,  it  is  an  essential  part  of  the  Verb. 

The  central  idea  is  not  is  good,  but  is  not  good.     In  other 

words,  not  is  tied  to  the  verb  so  tightly  that  it  cannot  be 

taken  off  at  all. 

Similarly,  "  I  praised  him  because  he  did  it  well." 
Did  well  is  the  verb  :   not  did. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         131 

Find  for  yourselves  other  examples  of  this  :  almost 
any  set  of  live  sentences  will  show  them. 

It  is  quite  a  natural  development  of  the  relations 
between  the  Adverb  and  the  Verb,  and  need  present  no 
real  difficulty. 

Usually  the  Verb  contains  the  main  thought,  and  the 
Adverb  adds  something  extra,  and  so  completes  it. 
The  Verb  does  the  main  work  :  the  Adverb  is  secondary 
and  is  rightly  called  a  servant.  It  can  at  a  pinch  be 
spared. 

There  are  cases,  however,  when  the  thought  added  by 
the  Adverb  is  of  great  importance  to  the  sense,  and  when 
it  can  not  be  spared.  There  are  cases  too  when  it  even 
overshadows  the  thought  conveyed  by  the  Verb.  In  all 
such  cases  it  has  become  an  integral  part  of  the  Verb  : 
it  has  ceased  to  be  a  servant.  The  combination  ought 
to  be  regarded  as  a  whole  and  never  taken  apart.      «, 

Exactly  the  same  thing  happens  with  the  Adjective 
The  Noun,  in  the  ordinary  way,  contains  the  main 
thought  and  the  Adjective  the  secondary  one.  It  some 
times  happens,  however,  that  the  thought  added  by 
the  Adjective  is  indispensable  ;  sometimes  it  is  actually 
the  main  thought,  and  that  conveyed  by  the  Noun  the 
secondary  one.  For  example  :  M  Industrious  boys  get 
prizes."  It  is  perfectly  impossible  to  dispense  with 
the  word  industrious.  "  The  cold  winds  made  my  face 
numb."  The  word  cold  is  at  least  as  important  as  the 
word  winds,  if  not  more  so. 

In  such  cases  the  Adjective  has  become  an  integral 
part  of  the  Noun.  The  combination  ought  to  be  re- 
garded as  a  whole  and  ought  never  to  be  taken  apart. 


132         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Industrious  boys  and  cold  winds  are  simply  composite 
nouns. 

Such  combinations  want  black  ink — not  red. 

The  exact  point  at  which  any  word  or  set  of  words 
ceases  to  be  subordinate  and  non-essential,  and  becomes 
essential,  is  a  matter  for  you  to  judge  :  there  is  no 
hard  and  fast  line. 


§4  Again,  difficulties  will  sometimes  arise  about  the 
analysis  of  questions.  For  example,  what  are  the 
Subjects  and  the  Verbs  in  : 

"  Is  it  time  to  get  up  ?  " 
"  Whose  is  the  next  study  ?  " 
ions       Such  difficulties  are  best  solved  by  separating  alto- 
gether the  idea  of  interrogation  from  the  statement. 
A  question  is  simply  a  statement  with  the  idea  of  in- 
terrogation   added.     This    idea   is    added    by    various 
means.     One  of  the  commonest  methods  is  an  interroga- 
tive word  or  words  in  a  suitable  position. 
"  You  like  pudding,"  is  a  statement. 
"  You  like  pudding,  eh  ?  "  is  a  question. 
Again,  compare  : 

"  You  love  your  master,  eh  ?  " 
Amas  ne  dominum  ? 
or  again : 

"  You  love  your  master,  don't  you  ?  " 
Nonne  dominum  amas  ? 
Vous  aimez  votre  maitre,  nest  ce  pas. 
Adding  the  question  idea  to  a  statement  is  exactly 
like  adding  a  second  idea  to  a  word  by  inflection.     A 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         133 

question  might  be  called  an  inflected  form  of  a  statement. 
The  interrogative  idea  can  be  added,  not  only  by  the 
use  of  special  words,  but  by  means  of  the  principle  of 
order.  It  is  shown  by  inverting  the  Verb  and  the 
Subject. 

"  He  is  gone." 
"  Has  he  gone  ?  " 
"  Said  he  aught  of  me?" 
"  No,  he  said  nothing." 
It  is  this  disturbance  of  the  position  of  the  Verb  and 
the  Subject  which  sometimes  makes  their  recognition 
difficult  in  questions.     The  sentence,  however,  cannot 
have  a  different  Subject  and  Verb  after  the  question  idea 
is  added  from  those  it  had  before. 

Hence  reduce  the  question  boldly  to  a  statement,  and 
apply  the  ordinary  principles. 

e.g.,  Whose  is  the  next  study  ? 
Consider  instead  :   The  next  study  is  mine. 

Subject :  The  next  study.    Verb  :  Is  mine. 
Hence  in  the  question  : 

Subject  :  The  next  study.    Verb  :  Is  whose. 


Another  form  of  sentence  which  will  be  frequently     §5 
encountered,  is  that  involving  the  postponement  of  the  Postpone- 
Subject.     For  example,  how  are  we  to  analyse    "  It  gJjjSjJl** 
is  a  pity  you  are  not  more  intelligent  "  ? 

Here  the  Verb  is  "  is  a  pity"  the  Subject  is  "  that  you 
are  not  more  intelligent." 

The  peculiarity  of  the  sentence  is  that  the  Subject, 
instead  of  standing  in  its  normal  place  before  the  Verb, 


134         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

has  been  postponed,  and  in  its  place  we  have  the  word 
it,  as  a  kind  of  temporary  stop-gap. 

No  such  departure  from  ordinary  practice  ever 
happens  without  a  reason ;  it  is  not  hard  to  find  in 
this  case. 

Consider  the  alternative,  "  That  you  are  not  more 
intelligent  is  a  pity." 

It  appears  instantly  that  the  Verb  is  overweighted 
by  the  size  of  the  Subject. 

The  central  idea  "  it  is  a  pity  "  which  ought  to  be 
dominant,  is  driven  into  comparative  obscurity.  It  is  in 
the  interests  of  the  Verb  that  the  Subject  is  postponed. 

Generally  speaking,  as  often  as  a  stop-gap  Subject  is 
put  in  and  the  position  of  the  real  Subject  changed,  it 
is  done  to  ensure  the  attention  being  where  the  real 
sense  lies. 

For  example  :    "  There  is  a  cow  in  that  field." 

The  alternative  is   "A  cow  is  in  that  field." 

The  Subject  is  "  a  cow,"  the  Verb  is  "  is  in  that  field." 

The  central  idea,  however,  is  the  presence  of  the  cow. 
An  introductory  Subject  is  therefore  put  in  and  cow  is 
transferred  to  the  centre  of  the  sentence.  The  post- 
ponement, in  this  case,  is  to  heighten  the  value  of  the 
Subject,  which,  in  its  normal  place,  would  not  receive 
the  necessary  attention. 

You  have  already  seen  that  in  writing  English  it  is 
necessary  to  ensure  that  the  servant  parts  do  not 
obscure  the  essential  parts.  It  is  equally  necessary  to 
maintain  proper  relations  between  the  central  word — 
the  Verb — and  the  closely  allied  ideas  of  the  Subject  and 
Object.     Variations  in  the  position  of  the  Subject,  such 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  135 

as  are  rendered  possible  by  the  use  of  the  introductory 
Subject,  make  it  possible  to  adjust  these  relations  with 
nicety.  In  an  analysis,  therefore,  "  it ."  is  to  be  regarded 
as  the  introductory  Subject  merely  and  in  no  case  must 
the  study  of  the  real  Subject  be  omitted.  The  point  of 
interest  is  not  only  what  is  the  real  Subject,  but  where 
it  is  and  why. 

Note  that  it  is  not  an  introductory  Subject  in  such 
expressions  as  "  It  rains,"  "  It  thunders."  "  It  "  in  such 
cases  is  the  real  Subject,  and  means  the  unknown  power 
to  whom  primitive  language-makers  ascribed  natural 
phenomena. 


As  long  as  your  sentences  are  short,  deal  with  them     §6 
by  one  or  other  of  the  foregoing  methods.     When  they  The  Man- 
get  long,  however,  it  will  not  be  the  relations  of  the  Rgee^ae{n0g 
Subject,.  Verb  and  Object  of  the  main  sentence  which  Sentencei 
will  need  attention,  so  much  as  the  relations  of  the 
servant  sentences  to  the  main  sentence  ;    the  first  step 
then  necessary  will  be  to  separate  the  essentials  of  the  full 
sentence  from  the  non-essentials. 

You  will  find  as  a  rule  such  sentences  fall  two  ways, 
either : 

I.     A  servant  part.  2.     The  main  sentence, 

or  1.     The  main  sentence.  2.     A  servant  part. 
They  do  not  as  a  rule  go  : 

1.     Servant.        2.     Main  sentence.       3.    Servant. 
If  they  do,  they  ought  not  to. 


I36         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

For  a  time  write  the  servant  parts  in  red  ink  and  put 
a  line  between  them  and  the  essential  part. 
Here  are  some  sentences  so  separated  : 

"  What  did  he  tell  you  |  when  you  saw  him  this 

afternoon  ?  " 
"  I  shall  never  believe  that  he  did  it,  |  whatever 

people  say" 
"  Three  of  them  |  who  were  badly  hurt  |  succumbed 

to  their  injuries." 
"  Can  you  tell  me  the  reason  why  little  children 
always  say  "  me  "  instead  of  "  I  "     (No  non- 
essentials). 
**  I  have  known  that  |  ever  since  I  was  a  boy." 
"  Though  he  was  old  |  his  sight  was  perfect." 
Always  in  analysis  keep  the  original  order  as  intact  as 
possible.     If  you  destroy  this,  you  will  lose  the  sense 
of  the  sentence  as  a  whole  and  will  never  see  where  to 
mend  it,  or  to  improve  it,  or  to  point  it,  as  the  case  may 
be.     This  is  the  value  of  red  ink.     It  distinguishes  with- 
out spoiling  the  order.     You  do  not  as  a  rule  need  for 
this  work  to  take  the  framework  apart,   (the  Subject, 
Verb,  and  Object,  or,  when  a  state  is  described,  the 
Subject  and  the  set  of  words  describing  the  state  ;  your 
work  is  rather  to  make  yourself  familiar  with  the  different 
sorts  of  ornaments  which  you  habitually  hang  on  this 
framework. 

Identify  them  ;   label  them  ;   as  far  as  possible  collect 
them    together. 

Leave  the  frame-work  clear  ;   where  you  can  see  it, 
with  the  non-essentials  on  one  side  or  the  other. 

When  you  have  done  this  to  fifty  or  sixty  of  your  own 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         137 

sentences,  you  will  probably  make  various  discoveries. 

1.  That  your  ornaments  are  not  very  often  sentences 
(once  in  how  many  times  ? ). 

2.  That  you  use  phrases  freely.  How  many  times 
in  a  dozen  sentences  ? 

3.  That  you  prefer  to  use  a  couple  of  principal 
sentences  connected  by  some  such  conjunction  as  and, 
rather  than  a  single  sentence  carrying  a  servant  sen- 
tence. You  don't  say,  "  Jones,  who  was  late  for  school, 
had  to  stay  behind  "  ;  you  say  "  Jones  was  late  for 
school  and  had  to  stay  behind." 

In  a  word,  you  talk  with  the  simpler  tools  and  with  the 
simpler  forms. 

Now  all  these  things  you  do  perfectly  rightly,  not  be- 
cause you  mean  to,  but  because  the  moment  you  do 
anything  else  you  cease  to  be  intelligible.  You  have 
been  taught  unconsciously  by  experience. 

There  was  once  a  bright  and  shining  saw  that  Willy 
desired  to  play  with.  Every  time  he  meddled  with  it 
he  cut  his  fingers.  He  soon  learnt  to  let  it  alone.  Willy 
has  now  gone  back  to  his  own  little  box  of  tools. 

You  are  like  Willy.  Every  time  you  meddled  with 
that  long  sentence  you  cut  your  fingers  ;  in  other  words 
you  ceased  to  be  understood.  You  have  learnt  to  take 
only  tools  you  can  handle. 

There  is  a  further  moral  to  this  parable.  There  are 
some  tools  you  can  use  and  others  you  cannot. 

The  ones  you  can  and  do  use,  when  you  mean  business, 
are  sentences  with  not  more  than  one  servant  sentence  ; 
up  to  there  you  are  masters  of  your  tools,  beyond  there, 
as  a  rule,  you  are  not. 


I38         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

See  to  it  therefore,  that  in  writing  letters,  or  essays, 
or  answers  to  questions  of  any  sort,  you  use  the  tools 
you  know. 

For  some  time  limit  yourself  deliberately  and  patiently 
to  one  servant  sentence.  Only  thus  will  you  attain 
clearness. 

Analyse  next  one  of  your  old  exercises  ;  for  example, 
a  written  historical  answer. 

How  many  sentences  in  that  answer  contain  more  than 
one  servant  sentence  ? 

If  there  is  more  than  an  accidental  one  here  and  there, 
your  habits  of  writing  are  almost  certainly  wrong.  You 
are  endeavouring  to  use  tools  that  are  beyond  you. 

Mend  your  habits.     It  can  soon  be  done  with  care. 

Re-write  first  every  offending  sentence  in  the  above 
exercise. 

Turn  the  superfluous  sentences  into  separate 
principal  sentences  if  necessary. 

Leave  no  sentence  with  more  than  one  servant 
sentence. 

It  will  be  found  that  the  effort  to  mend  generally 
means  reducing  the  servant  part.  It  can  be  done  in 
many  ways. 

You  will  see  them  best  by  some  examples. 

Caesar  returned  to  Rome  after  he  had 
conquered  the  Gauls. 

Essentials.  Non-essentials. 

1.     Caesar  returned      -        -    to  Rome 

after  he  had  conquered  the  Gauls. 
Cut  the  sentence  down  to  a  phrase. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  139 

2.  Caesar  returned      -        -    to  Rome 

after  his  victories  in  Gaul. 
Cut  the  phrase  down  to  a  word. 

3.  Caesar  returned      -        -    to  Rome  victorious ; 

or,  if  the  worst  comes  to  the  worst : 

4.  Caesar  returned      -        -    to  Rome. 

He  had  conquered  the  Gauls. 
"  I  shall  never  forgive  him  because  of  what  he  did 
when  he  was  Lord-Lieutenant. 
Essentials.  Non-essentials. 

1.  I  shall  never  forgive  him  -    because  of  what  he  did 

when  he  was  Lord-Lieu- 
tenant 
The    non-essentials   here    are    an    adverbial    servant 

sentence  with  a  sentence  dependent  on  it.     To  reduce  it, 

first  clear  off  the  dependent  part. 

2.  I  shall  never  forgive  him  -    for  what  he  did  as  Lord- 

Lieutenant. 
To  reduce  further  : 

3.  I  shall  never  forgive  him  -    for  his  conduct  as  Lord- 

Lieutenant  ; 
or  better  again  : 

4.  I  shall  never  forgive  him  -    his    conduct     as    Lord- 

Lieutenant. 
"  What  he  says,  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  he  has 
held  an  official  position  ever  since  the    present 
Government  came  into  office,  would  not   be  of 
importance." 
The  first  change  that  is  clearly  needed  is  to  put  the 
essentials  together . 


140         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

i.     What  he  says  would  not  be  of 

importance     -       '-      were  it  not  for  the  fact 

that  he  has  held  an 
official  position  ever 
since  the  present 
Government  came 
into  office. 
The  essential  part  of  this  sentence  contains  a  replacing 
sentence.     To  point  this  essential  part  is  the  next  stage. 

2.  His  words  would  be  unim- 

portant -        -        -      were    it    not    for    the 

fact,  etc. 
Note  the  removal  of  the  replacing  sentence. 
Note  also  the  change  from  the  negative  not  be  to  the 
positive  be  :  both  alterations  point  the  essential  part. 
Essentials.  Non-essentials. 

3.  His   words  would  be  unim- 

portant -  but  for  the  fact  that  he 

has  held  an  official 
position,  etc. 

4.  His  words  would  be  unim- 


5.     His 


portant  - 

- 

- 

had    he    not    held 

an 

official  position  ever 

since     the     present 

Government      came 

into  office. 

words   would 

be 

unim 

L- 

portant  - 

had    he    not    held 
official    position 
so  long. 

an 
for 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  I4I 

6.     His  words  would  be  unim- 
portant -        -        -      but    for    his    official 

position. 

If  this  process  of  reduction  means  sacrificing  too  much, 
and  losing  elements  you  really  want  to  say,  they  must 
be  taken  right  out  and  made  into  a  separate  sentence. 

For  example  : 

"  He  has  held  an  official  position  since  the  present 
Government  came  into  office ;  otherwise  his 
words  would  be  unimportant. 

Tt  does  not,  of  course,  follow  that  all  sentences  need 
sucli  reduction.  The  above  examples  are  to  show  you 
how  to  do  it  when  necessary. 

A  good  writer  will  so  order  his  sentences,  that  the 
servant  element  never  interferes  jwith  the  other ;  and 
you  will  find  in  many  examples  of  English  you  examine, 
that  neither  by  pointing  the  essential  part,  nor  by  re- 
ducing the  non-essential  part,  can  you  effect  the  least 
improvement ;  the  sentences  are  balanced  as  they  are  ; 
they  have  the  right  combination  of  fulness  and  clearness. 

On  the  other  hand,  your  own  long  sentences  will 
probably  need  ruthless  reduction.  As  was  explained 
above,  they  are  not  the  forms  you  naturally  use.  If 
you  have  ventured  on  handling  them  you  have  probably 
done  so  unskilfully. 


It  will  sometimes  be  necessary  to  analyse  passages  of     §7 

greater  intricacy  than  those  you  have  noticed.     A  sen-  Forms 

tence,  as  you  have  seen,  can  be  made  highly  complex  j™ 

by   stringing   sentences   on   to   sentences ;     moreover,  Complex 

Analysis 


142         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

when    this  happens,   obscurity  is  never  very  far    off. 

It  is  a  method,  however,  which  is  sometimes  employed 
justifiably.  Poets  use  it ;  so  do  certain  prose  writers 
whose  aim  approximates  to  that  of  the  poet.  They  are 
able  to  do  so,  because  their  main  object  is  not  so  much 
clearness  of  impression,  as  harmony  of  impression.  To 
apply  to  a  poem  the  analytical  methods  which  are 
natural  to  prose,  is  rather  like  dissecting  a  butterfly  ; 
it  is  putting  the  creature  to  a  use  it  was  never  intended 
for. 

If,  in  the  interests  of  science,  it  has  to  be  done,  choose 
an  arrangement  which  will  do  as  little  dismemberment 
as  possible. 

You  ought,  always,  at  every  stage,  to  be  able  to  see  your 
sentence  as  a  whole.  Especially  keep  order  intact.  To 
do  otherwise  is  like  taking  a  complicated  machine  to 
pieces,  and  mixing  up  the  parts.  You  can  study  and 
examine  any  particular  part,  it  is  true ;  but  you  have 
lost  the  most  valuable  element  of  all,  the  sense  of  its 
relation  to  the  whole. 

Any  form  of  analysis  which  destroys  the  life  of  the 
sentence  it  is  applied  to,  is  inadequate ;  for  it 
destroys  the  connections,  (e.g.,  the  order  connection), 
which  are  as  much  a  part  of  the  sentence  as  the  words 
they  connect. 


93   co 


43  x; 

.STo 

11 

£^ 
55  2 
la  £ 
co  >— i 

<u  43 

£   bo 


CD 

<d-2 

CD    C 

+J 

c/) 

'   2  >> 

43      Ol 

cti 

+»  £ 

'a 
o 

£2 

^3 

CD    C 

in 

A 

^ 

3 

?*\ 

* 

«5 

9 

j.Jf 

0> 

1 

<tt 

£  5 

6 

O 

fi| 

i 

«0 

PL. 

to 

3S 

o 

CD 

to* 

O 

T3 

>d 

o  « 

-d  "> 

Oh 

o 

45 
co 

cd 

-d  <S 

"o 

CO 

«  £ 

co 

co 

*"ft. 

T3 

I 

id 

CD 

Q 

^ 

£ 

O 

3 
3| 

a 

tS 

a 

o 

"co 

CO 

T3 
(3 

'S 

T3 

-a 

^3 
O 

bo 

a 
s 

CO 

a 
| 

| 

4-» 
5 

| 

o 

43 

2 
o 

§ 
1 

'bb 

CD 
O 

co 

o3 

4-* 

g 

<u 

43 

i 

CD 

43 

CD 

p 

o 

be 
o 

43 

bo 
a 
o 

a. 

CO 

CD 

> 

42 

CO 
CD 

43 

Is 

a> 

CD 

CD 

T3 

I 

H3 

43 

43 

43 

a 

o 

C 

H 

P 

P 

< 

fc 

< 

I}     CO 

|a. 

5  g 

13    g 

"1 

3^CD 

•§£  ! 

§£    : 

-H     bO 

•5  &43 
°  §  p 


~  .bo    d 

«a  'cd     »R 


43  T?  ^    Ph 


a 

'co    <j5 

flog 


s 

o 

a 

44 
cj 


9  S  S  -a     fll 


co    <« 

c  S  +J  ° 

os  °  c  o 


o  5S 


£  '§  .s  ^ 


m    TO    CD 


.a 

43 

I 

C 


s 

n    CD  +->    O 

-a  „   o  o  a^ 
^  S  CD  -J  ^ 

ill!** 

a 


CD         O    <D    g 
—        fli    to    ?¥ 


1   e 


8*815  1 

^p,«a 

a^ 
o 


bo  bo 

•S  a  (u  p  m 

<a^j3^  $  5 

5  2^  F  ao  -m 
jj     o  ^  u  S      a 

!  ISIHf 


-  22  rt  43  jj  a 
.  «J  g        ™  o 


I  *| 


144         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


I    J 


3 

3 

-«! 

5 

N 

<D 

> 

gL 

a 

o 

3 

1 

u 

% 

o 

d 

T3 

13 

1 

a 
4 

o 

H 

A    <a 

& 

3 
o 

S  £ 

g 

A 

>o    o 

o 

■<   "** 

a 

cu 

■** 

1 

3 
d 

T3 

1 

*> 

a 

d 

"3 

<u 

b 

§ 

rC 

o 

X! 

-M 

"5b 

C 

HH 

0) 

m 

'c3 

o 

,3 

o 

i 

«M 

■a 

CO 

s- 

J8 

42 

a 

0 

Jg 

1 

J3 

H 

< 

H 

THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  145 

The  foregoing  forms  of  analysis  have  been  based,  in     §  8 
the  main,  on  this  broad  principle. 

There  are  certain  parts  of  the  sentence  which  we  must  The 
have  ;    there  are  again  certain  parts  which  we  may  «nial«sis  ol 
have.     The  division  is  two-fold,  and  analysis  consists  Values 
in  the  identification  and  distinction  of  those  parts  of 
the  sentence  which  fall  under  one  division  or  the  other — 
more  especially  when  such  parts  are  embodied  in  re- 
placing sentences. 

Such  a  method  is  of  great  value  whenever,  as  in  or- 
dinary composition,  the  full  sentence  involves  anything 
like  the  free  use  of  replacing  sentences.  The  danger,  in 
such  cases,  is  always  the  disproportion  of  non-essentials. 
To  correct  it,  the  first  step  must  always  be  their 
identification. 

It  is  possible  however,  and  often  necessary,  to  look 
at  the  sentence  from  another  point  of  view. 

Instead  of  considering  it  as  consisting  of  a  framework 
of  essentials — with  various  ornaments  and  amplifications 
added — we  may  regard  it  as  expressing  one  central 
thought,  (generally  embodied  in  the  verb),  with  the  other 
thoughts  needed  to  complete  it  (Subjects,  Objects, 
Adjectives,  Adverbs,)  grouped  round  it. 

We  may  distinguish  these  additional  ideas,  not  as 
before,  by  the  test  of  "essential  or  non-essential," — but 
by  their  greater  or  less  degree  of  relationship  to  the 
central  idea. 

Thus  we  should  distinguish  a  Subject  from  an  ordinary 
servant  Adverb,  not  by  the  fact  that  one  can  be  spared 
and  the  other  cannot,  which  is  a  test  of  unlikeness,  but 
by  their  different  degrees  of  likeness.     They  are  both 

J 


I46         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

assisting  to  complete  the  central  idea ;  but  the  Subject 
does  it  in  the  closest  possible  relationship,  the  Adverb 
at  a  much  greater  distance. 

This  distinction  is  much  more  accurate,  and  much 
more  delicate  than  any  distinction  founded  on  differ- 
ences, and  it  expresses  itself  in  English,  at  least,  by- 
Order. 

Consider  such  a  sentence  as  : 

"  We  cut  the  tree  down  yesterday." 

Cutting  is  the  central  idea.  We  —  the  tree —  down  and 
—  yesterday  each  add  their  respective  shares,  viz.  : — 

That  we    —    did  the  cutting. 

That  the  cutting  was  done    —   to  the  tree. 

That  the  cutting  was    —   down 

That  the  cutting  was    —   yesterday. 

As  the  sentence  stands,  the  degree  of  importance  of 
these  additions  is  expressed  by  their  positions.  We 
is  first  in  importance,  standing  immediately  before 
the  verb. 

The  tree  is  next,  standing  immediately  after. 

Down  is  next — an  important  completion  of  the  verb. 

Yesterday  is  next — an  unimportant  completion. 

Note  that,  we  cannot  say  : 

"  We  cut  the  tree  yesterday  down." 

Again,  we  can  say : 

"  We  cut  down  the  tree  yesterday." 

It  follows  that  down  is  of  such  importance  to  the 
centraridea  that  it  not  only  is  incapable  of  following 
yesterday,  but  that  it  can  even  take  precedence  of  an 
object. 

We  arrive  at  the  same  result   in  another  way  when 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         147 

we  make  down  a  part  of  the  verb,  and  regard  it  as 
cut  down  rather  than  cut. 

You  may  learn  in  this  way  to  estimate  the  compara- 
tive values  of  words,  as  well  as  their  functions. 

Down  is  a  word  of  greater  value  to  the  central  idea 
than  yesterday,  and  has  a  little  more  or  a  little  less  value 
than  an  object,  according  to  the  precise  shade  of  meaning 
expressed. 

Compare  : 

M  He  gave  away  the  money." 
u  He  gave  the  money  away." 

The  first  sentence  concentrates  attention  on  the 
manner  of  the  gift,  the  second  on  the  fate  of  the  money. 

In  the  first  case  away  outweighs  money,  in  the  second 
money  outweighs  away. 


Generally  speaking,   Order  is  an  instrument  of  the 
greatest  precision  for  express:ng  exact  values. 
Consider : 

"  He  obviously  knew  all  about  it." 
A  first  rough  analysis  would  give  : 
Knew  the  verb. 

Obviously  an  adverb. 

No  ordinary  servant  adverb,  however  can  stand  in 
such  a  position  as  obviously  does. 
We  cannot  say : 

"  He  to-day  knew  all  about  it." 
Obviously  if  a  complement  of  the  verb  is  clearly  not 
an  ordinary  subordinate  complement. 


148         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

We  may  therefore  have  recourse  to  the  analysis  : 
Obviously  knew      the  Verb. 
He      -        -  the  Subject. 

All  about  it  the  Object. 

Even  this,  however,  is  inadequate. 

Why  must  we  say  : 

"  He  obviously  knew  all  about  it  "  ? 

When  we  may  not  say  : 

**  He  knew  obviously  all  about  it  "  ? 

The  conclusion  is  that  obviously  is  the  more  important 
word  of  the  two  and  carries  the  main  part  of  the  central 
idea ;  and  the  analysis  we  arrive  at  is  that  obviously 
is  the  centre  of  the  sentence,  closely  supported  by  knew, 
with  he  and  all  about  it  third  and  fourth  respectively. 

There  is  clearly  a  great  difference  between  a  result 
like  this,  and  the  plan  of  treating  obviously  as  an  adverb  ; 
to  do  so,  while  in  one  sense  correct,  suggests  that  the 
word  which  really  is  the  key  of  the  sentence  is  subordi- 
nate and  of  minor  importance  to  the  sense. 

The  same  conclusion  can  be  reached  from  another 
side. 

"  He  obviously  knew  all  about  it,"  is  equivalent  to 
"  It  was  obvious  that  he  knew  all  about  it." 

Obviously  which  in  the  first  case  was  the  real  though 
not  the  formal  centre  of  the  sentence,  has  become  in 
was  obvious,  the  formal  centre.  Neither  sentence  is 
equivalent  to  "  Obviously  he  knew  all  about  it,"  where 
knew  and  not  obviously  is  paramount. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         I49 

The  study  of  the  relation  of  the  adjective  to  the  central     §9 
idea  is  highly  instructive. 

It  varies  with  every  adjective. 

The  adjective  is  related,  in  the  first  instance,  not  to  TheDiffer- 
the  word  which  normally  embodies  the  central  idea,  the  ^fa*  UM 
verb,  but  to  one  of  the  outlying  words.  Adjective 

Hence  in  the  ordinary  way  its  connection  is  indirect 
and  distant. 

An  adjective  completing  a  noun,  which  itself  is  only 
a  distant  complement  of  the  central  idea,  has  the  least 
share  of  all  in  building  up  the  general  sense  of  the 
sentence, 

"  The  butterfly  settled  on  a  large  stone." 

The  word  large  has  practically  no  connection  with  the 
central  idea  settled ;  stated  otherwise,  large  has  no 
adverbial  character,  but  is  a  pure  adjective. 

But  consider  : 

"  A  large  stone  broke  the  window  to  atoms." 

The  largeness  has  a  good  deal  to  do  with  broke  to 
atoms."  A  stone  the  size  of  a  pea  would  not  have  done 
it.  Large  has  begun  to  bear  on  the  verb,  and  has  some 
adverbial  character. 

Again  : 

"  A  large  stone  (a  diamond)  would  cost  hundreds 
of  pounds." 

Large  here  is  not  only  bearing  on  the  verb,  but  is 
doing  the  main  part  of  the  work  of  the  subject.  It  is 
a  more  important  word  than  stone.  Its  relation  to  the 
Verb  is  more  than  Adverbial.  It  is  tending  towards  a 
subject  relation. 


;?  L.O- : .  .   z 


-Jie 


:;-::i 


±t 


:t! 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         151 

of  the   different  weights  of  the   non-essential  words. 

The  most  accurate  distinction,  therefore,  is  the  one 
which  estimates  the  value  of  the  different  services 
rendered  by  each  of  the  components  of  the  sentence  to 
the  central  idea. 

Such  an  analysis  may  be  called  quantitative  rather 
than  qualitative;  it  is  made  by  means  of  the  study  of 
the  order  of  a  sentence,  and  of  the  possible  and  impossible 
variations  of  it. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 

THE    CONNECTION    OF    IDEAS. 
SYNTHESIS. 

You  learnt  in  the  last  chapter  how  to  analyse,  that  is, 
how  to  take  to  pieces  sentences  containing  a  great  many 
parts. 

Now  if  a  word  is  a  tool,  a  sentence  is  a  tool  composed 
of  several  parts,  and  a  complicated  sentence,  such  as  those 
we  have  been  examining,  may  be  fitly  compared  to  a 
machine. 

A  machine  is  pulled  to  pieces  for  two  reasons — there 
may  be  something  the  matter  with  it ;  in  this  case  it 
wants  mending,  like  sentences  in  some  of  your  exercises  ; 
or  on  the  other  hand  its  owner  may  want  to  see  how  it 
works,  in  which  case  the  putting  together  is  as  important 
as  the  pulling  to  pieces. 

It  is  time  this  process  began. 

To  begin  with,  why  do  you  put  ideas  together 
at  all  ? 

You  do,  as  a  matter  of  fact,  put  together  in  your  own 
speech,  not  only  sentences,  but  words  of  all  sorts,  Nouns, 
Verbs,  Adjectives,  and  so  on. 

For  example,  put  a  pair  of  nouns  together  in  any 
sense  making  sentence. 

"  The  gardener  planted  the  shrub." 

Or  a  noun  and  a  verb  : 

"  Jones  is  going  skating." 
152 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         153 

Or  a  pair  of  sentences  : 

"  He  went  out  and  bought  a  pair  of  boots," 
"  He  could  not  run,  because  he  had  no  legs." 
Or  a  pair  of  adjectives  : 

"  Give  me  two  or  three  shillings." 
Can  you  join  up  in  this  way  any  two  things  you  like  ? 
Any  two  nouns  for  example 

Join  in  any  sense  making  sentence  a  whale  and  an 
inflection. 

If  you  cannot  manage  it,  why  cannot  you  ? 
Join  again  a  whale  and  an  oak  tree,  or  again  a  hairpin 
and  an  isosceles  triangle. 
Again,  join  these  up  in  any  way  you  like  : 
"  The  mutton  was  high," 
"  The  fish  whisked  his  tail." 
If  you  cannot  do  it,  why  not  ?     If  you  can,  why  ? 
Join  again  : 

*•  The  mutton  was  tough," 
"  The  rain  fell  in  torrents." 
You  will  have  probably  found  out,  in  your  efforts,  that 
some  ideas  are  a  great  deal  easier  to  join  up  than  others. 
You  can  join  a  whale  to  a  ship  a  great  deal  more 
easily  than  you  can  attach  him  to  an  inflection,  or  to  an 
oak  tree. 

Do  it  and  convince  yourself. 

Find  a  better  friend  for  The  mutton  was  high,  than  the 
fish  sentence. 

Why  is  connection  of  this  sort  sometimes  easy  and 
sometimes  difficult  ?  The  answer  is  simple.  The 
words  and  sentences  cannot  be  connected,  because  the 
ideas  that  they  represent  are  not  connected. 


tions 


154  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

On  the  other  hand,  the  more  closely  things  or  ideas 
are  connected,  the  more  closely  will  the  words  or 
sentences  be  connected. 

Now,  pairs  or  sets  of  ideas  are  connected  with  each 
other  in  all  sorts  of  ways,  ranging  from  a  very  distant 
connection  indeed  to  a  very  close  one. 

We  ought,  therefore,  to  be  able  to  tie  together  the 
words  or  sentences  that  express  them  by  various  kinds 
of  connection,  ranging  from  a  way  which  gives  a  very 
distant  connection,  to  a  way  which  gives  a  very  close 
one. 
«nn!UnC*  S°  we  can  !  Now  you  can  see  something  of  what 
Conjunctions  are  for. 
§2  Conjunctions  are  words  which  express  the  different 
kinds  of  connection,  not  between  any  two  ideas,  but 
between  two  ideas  of  a  similar  kind. 

You  should  note  carefully — Conjunctions  do  not  do 
anything  like  the  whole  work  of  connection,  but  only 
that  between  similar  ideas. 

The  connection  between  dissimilar  ideas  is  done  by 
different  tools,  as  you  will  learn  later  on. 

The  main  importance  of  Conjunctions  lies  in  the  fact 
that,  among  the  similar  ideas  they  connect,  are  the  ideas 
we  express  by  sentences. 

A  sentence  is  only  a  verb  on  a  large  scale,  and  the 
connection  between  two  sentences  is  simply  the  con- 
nection between  a  couple  of  verb  ideas,  which  of  course 
are  similar. 


§3        As  there  are  many  degrees  of  connection  between  two 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  155 

pairs  of  Verb  ideas,  there  will  naturally  be  Conjunctions 
to  correspond. 

As  two  sentences  stand  side  by  side  they  may  be 
connected  by  a  very  loose  bond  indeed,  and  be  practically 
independent  of  each  other. 

As  connection  between  them  grows,  however,  there 
comes  a  time  when  the  ideas  become  not  two,  but  one. 

Exactly  where  this  point  comes  is  sometimes  hard  to 
define  ;  but  it  does  come  ;  and  connection  between  the 
two  sentences,  after  that  point,  is  of  a  different  nature 
from  what  it  was  before. 

Before  that  point,  the  second  sentence  had  an  inde- 
pendent existence,  as  a  member  of  the  main  train  of 
thought  of  which  both  sentences  formed  a  part.  After 
that  point,  it  has  given  up  its  independent  existence. 
It  exists,  not  for  the  larger  world,  but  solely  for  the 
sentence  which  precedes  it. 

It  is  now  properly  called  a  dependent  or  subordinate 
sentence. 

The  Conjunctions  that  made  the  connection  before 
that  point  was  reached  are  usually  called  Co-ordinate 
Conjunctions  ;  those  that  make  it  after  that  point  are 
usually  called  Subordinate  Conjunctions. 

Apply  this  to  any  particular  train  of  related  ideas. 

A  traveller,  we  will  say,  is  attacked  by  brigands.  We 
might  say,  "  They  caught  him  and  cut  his  throat." 

These  are  simply  two  steps  in  the  main  story. 

Two  things  were  done,  two  actions  expressed  ;  first 
the  catching,  then  the  throat-cutting. 

Their  connection  is  the  very  slight  one  of  their  happen- 
ing successively,  close  together,  in  a  given  portion  of 
time. 


156         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

It  is  expressed  by  placing  the  two  sentences  together, 
in  the  order  of  the  events,  and  by  placing  between  them 
the  conjunction  and. 

We  may,  however,  express  it  "  After  they  had  caught 
him  they  cut  his  throat." 

One  thing  only  is  expressed  here — throat-cutting  with 
attendant  circumstances.  The  sentence  After  they  had 
caught  him,  has  given  up  its  work  in  the  main  story. 

If  you  do  not  believe  it,  write  the  main  story  on 
both  sides  of  the  two  sentences.  Take  out  After  they 
had  caught  him.  The  story  will  be  less  full,  but  its  sense 
will  not  be  broken.  Take  out  They  cut  his  throat,  the 
sense  will  be  wrecked. 

The  first  way,  therefore,  expresses  "catching"  and 
"  throat-cutting",  the  second,  "  throat-cutting  with 
attendant  circumstances." 

Hence,  if  you  desire  to  concentrate  your  hearer's 
attention  on  throat-cutting  choose  the  latter  method. 

If  you  are  concerned  rather  with  the  two  actions  than 
the  one,  choose  the  first. 

These  two  methods  of  connecting  a  pair  of  sentences 
may  fitly  be  called  Equi-connection  and  Sub-connection. 

The  choice  between  them  is  exactly  like  the  choice 
between  the  active  and  the  passive  forms  of  the  verb. 
It  depends  entirely  on  where  you  desire  to  concentrate 
attention. 

It  is  clear,  too,  that  when  sub-connection  is  chosen, 
the  true  spirit  of  its  use  will  be  for  the  main  idea  to  be 
in  prominence  and  the  other  in  the  shade.  A  subordinate 
connection  where  this  is  not  so  is  approximating  to  an 
equi-connection,  and  the  other  method  of  connection 
is  becoming  preferable. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         157 

You  should  note  that,  in  your  own  speech,  you  habitu- 
ally choose  equi-connection  rather  than  sub-connection. 

Note  also  that  the  English  language  chooses  equi- 
connection  rather  than  sub-connection,  but  that  Latin 
makes  free  use  of  sub-connection. 

Note  also  that  though  equi-connection  and  sub- 
connection  are  often  matters  of  choice,  they  are  not 
entirely  so.  A  succession  of  incidents  often  happens 
which  is  by  far  most  appropriately  expressed  by  equi- 
connection. 

If  Caesar  had  said  : — 

"  Cum  venissem,  et  cum  vidissem,  vici,'" 
instead  of  "  Veni,  vidi,  vici,"  he  would  not  have  been 
Caesar,  but  a  rather  long-winded  old  woman. 

Sometimes  the  only  possible  connection  is  equi- 
connection.     For  instance : 

What  happened  on  Tuesday  ? 

The  cow  died  and  the  House  of  Lords  was  abolished. 

Two  such  events  must  be  independently  expressed. 


As  was  noted  above,  connection  by  Conjunctions  of     §4 
any  sort  is  only  a  small  part  of  the  connection  that  is  connection 
going  on  between  ideas,  wherever  language  is  used.  generally 

Subjects  and  Objects  are  connected  with  verbs, 
Adjectives  are  connected  with  Nouns,  and  so  on. 

Connection  of  different  kinds  is  the  very  breath  of  life 
to  a  sentence. 


I58         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Take  any  collection  of  words ;  strip  from  them  the 
inflections  and  the  particular  positions  which  connect 
them,  and  there  is  nothing  left  but  dry  bones. 

"  The  ship  was  dashed  against  the  rocks  by  the 
force  of  the  waves." 

Take  away  the  connectives  and  it  becomes  : 
The  rocks,  the  waves,  dash,  the  force,  the  ship. 

The  conjunction  is  only  one  of  a  number  of  connect- 
ing tools  that  we  use. 

What  are  the  others  ?  Case,  which  connects  noun 
ideas  to  verb  ideas,  adjective  ideas  to  noun  ideas. 
Preposition,  which  connects' the  noun  idea  to  the  verb 
idea,  or  the  noun  used  adjectivally  to  the  noun. 

In  a  more  subtle  way,  some  inflections  of  the  verb  do 
the  same  work. 

Last,  but  not  least,  Order  is  freely  used ;  it  connects 
our  own  subjects  and  objects  to  the  verb. 

What  is  the  difference  between  such  connectives 
as  these,  and  the  conjunction  connecting  tools  ? 

Examine  the  connections  which  they  make,  until  you 
see. 

Case,  Order,  and  Prepositions  define  the  connections 
between  dissimilar  ideas,  Conjunctions  define  the  con- 
nections between  similar  ideas. 

Hence  we  see  the  real  parts  of  speech  are  Nouns,  Pro- 
nouns, which  replace  them,  and  Verbs,  with  Adjectives 
and  Adverbs. 

Most  of  the  inflections,  more  especially  Case,  with  the 
Conjunction,  the  Preposition,  and  Order  simply  connect 
them. 


CHAPTER  IX. 

THE  CONNECTION  OF  REPLACING 
SENTENCES. 

It  is  clear  that  for  one  sentence  to  merge  its  identity 
in  another  as  has  been  described  in  what  we  called 
sub-connection,  the  second  sentence  must  be  of  an 
adverbial  nature  to  the  first.  The  first  sentence  is  a 
step  in  the  main  story.  It  must  be  of  the  nature  of  a 
verb.  Any  sentence  which  extends  it,  or  explains  it, 
must  therefore  be  adverbial  to  it. 

We  consequently  have  the  principle ;  no  sentence 
which  is  not  of  an  adverbial  nature,  is  capable  of  sub- 
connection  with  another. 

If  this  is  so,  what  is  the  connection  of  an  adjective 
sentence  with  a  main  sentence  ? 

Precisely  the  same  considerations  apply  that  became 
evident  when  we  were  investigating  the  relation  of  an 
ordinary  adjective  to  the  central  idea. 

i.     An  adjective  may  be  a  mere  adjunct  of  the  nouns      §1 
furnishing  additional  or  interesting  information  about  The 
the  noun,  but  with  little  or  no  bearing  on  the  verb.       sentence6 
e.g.,  "  A  newly-built  cottage  occupied  the 
foreground." 

Newly-built  has  no  bearing  on  occupied.  It  is  a  pure 
adjective. 

Similarly,  replacing  adjective  sentences  may  be  of 
this  nature  ;  if  they  bear  entirely,  or  even  mainly  on  the 
noun  they  are  attached  to,  their  function  is  purely  ad- 

159 


l60         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

jectival.  They  cannot  enter  into  sub-connection,  i.e., 
into  adverbial  relations  with  the  main  sentence.  Their 
connection  is  equi-connection,  for  they  are  independent 
of  the  verb,  in  spite  of  their  dependence  on  their  own 
noun.  They  need  nothing  but  expression  (usually  by 
an  indicative)  and  an  order  attachment  to  their  noun. 
"  Mr.  Smith,  who  had  lately  returned  from 
India,  made  an  excellent  speech." 

2.  Again,  adjectives  may  have  a  distinct  bearing  on 
the  verb,  i.e.,  a  distinct  adverbial  character. 

e.g.,  "  A  faithful  few  followed  him  through  all  his 
misfortunes." 

In  exactly  the  same  way  replacing  adjective  sentences 
may  bear  very  distinctly  on  the  central  idea  of  the 
sentence,  and  not  only  on  the  noun  they  are  nominally 
attached  to. 

In  such  a  case,  like  the  single  word  adjectives  con- 
sidered above,  they  have  gained  an  adverbial  character  ; 
they  enter  into  sub-connection  precisely  as  the  formal 
adverb  sentence  does ;  the  connecting  tool  is  the 
Subjunctive.     (See  §  2  of  this  Chapter.) 

"  Caesar  misit  legatos,  qui  pacem  peterent." 

Qui  pacem  peterent,  shows  a  Subjunctive  in  sub- 
connection,  because  it  bears  on  misit. 

Caesar  misit  legatos,  qui  pacem  petierunt. 

Qui  pacem  petierunt  shows  an  Indicative  in  equi- 
connection,  because  it  does  not  bear  on  misit. 

Caesar  sent  certain  messengers  ;  these  men  afterwards 
did  so  and  so. 

!   !The  exact  point  at  which  the  bearing  of  the  replacing 
adjective    sentence  on   the   Verb  becomes    sufficiently 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         l6l 

pronounced  to  justify  sub-connection,  and  the  Sub- 
junctive (i.e.,  the  subjoining  mood),  is  a  matter  for 
you  to  judge.  You  will  have  at  and  near  that  point 
the  option  of  using  a  Subjunctive  or  an  Indicative, 
(sub-connection  or  equi-connection),  according  as  you 
desire  the  sense  of  the  replacing  sentence  to  lean  towards, 
or  away  from  the  verb. 


Note  that  a  replacing  adjective  sentence  has  certain 
limitations  of  its  own,  from  which  a  single  word  adjective 
is  free. 

Owing  to  its  length,  an  adjective  Sentence  can  never 
precede  its  noun  as  a  single  word  adjective  does. 

Hence  when  an  adjective  sentence  is  attached  to 
the  Subject,  it  has  of  necessity  to  occupy  the  highly 
important  position  between  the  Subject  and  the  Verb. 
Now  this  is  the  vital  spot  of  the  sentence,  and  nothing 
can  stand  in  it  without  making  havoc  of  the  Subject 
and  Verb  connection,  except  an  idea  which  is  in  close 
relation  both  to  the  Subject  and  the  Verb. 

Compare  the  French  refusal  to  allow  adverbs  there. 

Hence  we  find  the  adjective  sentence  following  the 
subject  constantly  containing  introductory  matter  to 
the  Verb,  and  at  its  best  when  doing  so. 

"  The  sailor,  who  had  been  watching  us  curiously, 
now  accosted  us." 

K 


l62         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

"  Their  leader,  who  was  as  strong  as  a  bull, 
hurled  his  assailants  backwards." 
The    adjective    sentence    in    both    these    examples 
directly  paves  the  way  for  the  verb. 

When  the  matter  is  not  introductory  it  must  not  go 
there. 

"  The  soldier,  whose  name  was  Thomas  Atkins, 
reloaded  his  rifle." 
Note  the  instinct  that  you  have  against  such  a  form. 
Note  again  the  effort  to  soften  it  by  parenthesis. 
14  The  soldier  (his  name  was  Thomas  Atkins)  re- 
loaded his  rifle." 
In  other  words  the  Adjective  Sentence  in  some  cases 
not  only  may  be,  but  must  be  strongly  adverbial ;   and 
it  may  then  be  used  with  great  effect,  not  to  interfere 
with,  but  to  point  and  to  reinforce  the  highly  important 
connection  between  Subject  and  Verb. 

The  same  necessity  for  an  adverbial  character  is  not 
present  in  adjective  sentences  attached  to  the  Object ; 
for  in  such  cases  the  main  work  of  the  sentence  is  done 
before  the  adjective  sentence  is  reached. 
At  the  same  time  such  sentences  often  are  adverbial. 
"  I  punished  the  boy,  who  had  committed  the 
offence," 
is  quite  a  different  combination  to  : 

"  I  punished  the  boy,  who  went  home  directly 
afterwards." 


3.  Again,  while  adjectives  can,  and  often  do  acquire 
an  adverbial  character,  this  extension  of  their  functions 
does  not  stop  there. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  163 

They  can  become  in  practice  essential  parts  of  the 
Subject  or  Object  ideas. 

Consider  : 

"  Industrious  boys  get  prizes." 

The  Subject  really  is  The  industrious.  Of  the  two 
components  of  the  full  Subject  Industrious  boys,  we  can 
spare  boys  far  better  than  industrious.  Industrious 
predominates,  and  is  morally,  though  not  formally,  the 
noun. 

It  may  be  said  that  industrious  bears  strongly  on  the 
verb — a  fact  in  favour  of  its  adverbial  character.  This 
is  perfectly  true,  but  does  not  go  far  enough.  The 
assistance  that  industrious  renders  to  the  verb  is  more 
than  adverbial ;  it  has  become  identified  with  the 
Subject.  Its  connection  with  the  verb  is  not  a  subordin- 
ate one,  but  the  reverse. 

Hence,  when  such  a  single  word  adjective  is  replaced 
by  a  sentence  : — "  Those  who  are  industrious  get  prizes  " 
— the  replacing  sentence  is  governed  by  exactly  the 
same  principles.  It  is  not  subordinate  to  the  verb.  Its 
relation  to  it  is  that  of  a  sutject,  not  of  an  adverb. 

Hence  the  term  Sub-connection  does  not  apply. 
Sub-connection  denotes  the  connection  of  one  complete 
verb  (a  sentence) ,  in  an  adverbial  function,  with  another 
complete  verb.  But  we  are  dealing  here  not  with  the 
connection  of  a  verb  with  a  verb,  but  of  a  subject  with 
a  verb  ;  the  replacing  sentence  requires  exactly  what  a 
subject  requires  ;  (i)  to  be  expressed  :  (ii)  to  be  placed 
in  its  right  position  in  the  sentence. 


164  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  principles  which  apply  to  the  adjective  sentence 
when  essential  to  a  Subject  and  not  merely  supplement- 
ing it,  apply  to  it  equally  when  it  forms  an  essential 
part  of  an  Object. 

In  "  Those  who  are  industrious  thrive,"  the  adjective 
sentence  is  practically  part  of  the  Subject.  It  must  be 
treated  as  such,  and  not  subordinated. 

In  "  The  hospitals  received  those  who  were  hurt," 
the  adjective  sentence  is  practically  part  of  the  Object ; 
it  must  be  treated  as  such,  and  not  subordinated. 

The  same  principles  apply  again  to  the  Noun  Sentence 
pure  and  simple  : 

"  I  wish  you  would  come  oftener." 

In  none  of  these  cases  is  there  any  question  whatever 
of  subordination. 


§  2         As  a  result  of  the  foregoing  reasoning  we  have  : 

A.  Dependent  on  the  Verb  and  capable  of  Sub-connection. 
(1)     The  pure  Adverb  Sentence. 

(2).  The  Adjective  Sentence  which  bears  too  much 
on  the  Verb  to  be  regarded  as  a  mere  adjunct  of 
the  noun  ;  but  which  does  not  bear  enough  on  the 
noun  to  be  indispensable  to  it. 

B.  Independent  of  the    Verb,  and  entering  therefore  only 
into  independent  connection  with  it. 

(1).     The   Adjective    Sentence,    which   is    the    mere 
adjunct  of  a  noun. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  165 

(2).  The  Adjective  Sentence,  which  has  become  an 
essential  part  of  the  non-subordinate  Subject 
or  Object. 

(3).  The  Noun  Sentences,  which  stand  for  the  Subject 
or  Object. 


You  express  the  Sub-connection  by  the  Subjunctive,  The 
in  the  first  set  of  sentences.     You  do  it,  however,  not  aJf-jSj?! 
because  the  Subjunctive  in  itself  expresses  Sub-connec-  Sentences 
tion  :    it  does  not ;   it  expresses  the  thought  or  mental 
figure  of  an  action,   as  opposed  to  the  record  of  its 
happening,  which  is  the  Indicative  idea. 

You  do  it  because  you  present,  when  you  express 
sub-connection,  not  two  blunt  records  of  events  (as 
you  do  in  Equi-connection),  but  the  first  event  only, 
and  then  thoughts  about  the  second,  viz.  :  your  views 
about  its  relations  to  the  first  :  these  require  a  Sub- 
junctive to  express  them. 

Sub-connection  leads  to  the  employment  of  a  Sub- 
junctive, but  one  is  the  work  and  the  other  is  the  tool. 
It  does  not  follow  that  the  tool  cannot  do  other  work. 
The  Subjunctive  is  used  (always  to  express  the  same 
thing,  the  thought  or  figure  of  an  action)  in  many 
sentences  which  are  not  in  Sub-connection. 

Nor  does  it  follow  that  the  same  work  cannot  be  done 
with  other  tools. 

English  constantly  forsakes  Sub-connection  for  Equi- 
connection,  e.g.,  "  He  will  never  do  it,  strong  though  he 
may  be,"  gets  discarded  for,  "  He  will  never  do  it,  strong 
as  he  is." 


l66         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  relationships  of  the  independent  replacing  sen- 
tences to  the  main  sentence  are  expressed  solely  by 
position. 

Of  the  sentences  enumerated  under  the  heading  B., 

position  alone  attaches  No.  i  to  its  noun,  No.  2  to  the 

Subject  or  Object  of  which  it  is  an  essential  part,  and 

No.  3  to  the  Verb  of  which  it  is  the  Subject  or  Object. 

The  In-  In   other  words,   position   does  for  these  sentences 

Re^ptecing  wnat  tne  Subjunctive  Inflection  and  the  conjunction 

Sentences   between  them  do  for  the  Sub-connected  sentences,  viz.  : 

defines  their  relationship  to  the  main  sentence. 

Compare  the  parallel  uses  of  position  and  the  Case 
ending  to  define  the  relationships  of  nouns  to  a  verb. 

These  sentences  need  merely  what  the  words  they 
replace  needed,  viz.  :  saying  and  placing  :  by  "  saying  " 
is  meant  independent  expression  which  has  no  reference 
to  any  external  relationship  of  the  sentence,  but  takes 
account  solely  of  the  ideas  it  is  desired  to  convey. 

The  Moods  used  for  such  expression  may  be  any  that 
fit  the  sense. 

You  will  use  the  Indicative  or  Subjunctive  according 
as  you  require  to  speak  of  an  action  or  the  mental  picture 
of  one.  The  Indicative  is  the  normal  mood,  but  you  will 
sometimes  require  the  Subjunctive  for  the  following 
reasons : 

The  main  verb  of  your  sentence  will  sometimes  deal 
not  with  the  actual  world,  but  with  the  thought  world  ; 
and  when  that  is  so  the  complementary  ideas  of  it  (i.e., 
the  Subject  or  Object  or  Adverbial  ideas)  will  some- 
times need  to  be  thought  too,  i.e.,  not  real  actions  or 
states  but  thoughts,  or  figures,  or  mental  pictures  of 
those  actions  or  states. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         167 

You  cannot  tell  a  real  action.  A  real  action  can  only 
be  done  You  can  only  tell  your  thought  of  or  the  story 
of  a  real  action. 

You  cannot  know  a  real  action  ;  you  cannot  ask  a 
real  action ;  you  cannot  wish  or  think  a  real  action. 
Again,  a  real  action  cannot  be  the  subject  of  such  a  verb 
as  is  impossible,  would  be  a  shame,  is  necessary,  and  so  on. 

In  other  words,  the  nouns  you  are  dealing  with  are 
not  the  names  of  actions  or  states,  but  the  names  or 
descriptions  of  thoughts  of  actions  or  states. 

Hence  such  nouns  are  to  be  expressed  by  the  Sub- 
junctive. 

M  Die  mini  quid  feceris." 
'*  I  wish  you  would  tell  me." 

The  Infinitive  will  express  such  figures  of  actions 
when  the  doers  of  them  are  either  obvious  or  un- 
important.    "I  wish  to  know." 


Replacing  sentences  are  sometimes  constructed  with     §3 
one  or  other  of  the  compound  relatives  "  what  "  "  where  "  Compound 
u  how,"  etc.     Such  sentences  are  apt  to  lead  to  con-  combina- 
fusion.  tions 

To  guard  against  this,  analyse  the  connection  of  the 
compound  relative  combinations. 

The  compound  relative  does  away  with  the  separation 
between  the  relative  and  its  antecedent.  They  are  no 
longer  two,  but  one. 


l68         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Hence  its  use  turns  the  antecedent  and  the  following 
relative  sentence  into  one  whole. 

This  whole  is  not,  as  it  is  often  mistakenly  called,  a 
sentence,  but  a  noun.  It  is  not  a  sentence  at  all :  it  is 
simply  the  antecedent,  magnified  ;  and  as  a  noun,  with 
which  an  adjective  sentence  has  coalesced,  it  is  no  more  a 
sentence  than  any  other  combination  of  a  noun  and  an 
adjective.  Call  it  if  you  choose  a  noun  combination, 
but  do  not  call  it  a  noun  sentence  :  it  denotes  a  thing, 
not  a  happening,  as  a  sentence  does. 

Its  functions  in  the  sentence  are  precisely  those  of 
any  other  noun  :  thus  it  may  act  as  the  subject. 

What  happened,  was  most  interesting  :    i.e.,  a  certain 
thing  was  most  interesting. 
It  may  act  as  Object. 

Tell  me  how  to  do  it,  i.e.,  Tell  me  a  certain  thing. 
It  may  help  to  form  an  adverbial  phrase. 
I  found  it  where  you  left  it,  i.e.,  I  found  it  in  a  certain 
spot. 

I  honoured  him  for  what  he  did,  i.e.,  I  honoured  him 
for  a  certain  thing. 

He  came  exactly  when  I  told  him,  i.e.,  He  came  at 
a  certain  time. 

It  may  do  verbal  and  adjectival  work. 
He  is  not  what  he  seems,  i.e.,  He  is  not  a  certain  thing. 
The  Noun  Combination  in  all  these  functions  is  con-  . 
nected  with  the  verb  of  the  sentence  it  works  in,  precisely 
as  any  other  noun  is  :  viz.,  by  position. 

To  express  it,  use  whatever  mood  fits  the  sense.  If 
for  example,  the  combination  is  the  Object  of  a  verb 
of  mentality,  the  Thought  Mood  will  be  needed.  You 
may  need  the  same  mood  for  Subjects  sometimes. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  169 

Take  care  not  to  confuse  such  adverbial  phrases  as 
those  shown  above,  with  adverbial  sentences  in  sub- 
connection.  There  is  no  question  of  sub-connection 
here.  Sub-connection  is  a  relation  between  one  happen- 
ing and  another  happening.  This  is  a  relation  between 
a  thing  and  a  happening. 

Note  that  the  moment  you  cease  to  use  the  Compound 
Relative  the  noun  combination  spoken  of  above,  splits 
up  into  its  original  components.  What  was  one  sen- 
tence, becomes  two,  and  the  original  principles  apply. 

e.g.,  "  Tell  me  what  you  did  "  is  one  sentence  :  "  What 
you  did  "  is  a  noun  combination.  "  Tell  "  is  a  verb 
of  mentality.  The  combination  really  means  "  the 
tale  of  your  action."  "  Die  mihi  quid  feceris."  Quid 
being  the  Latin  compound  relative. 

On  the  other  hand  you  may  say  if  you  choose,  "  Tell 
me  that,  which  you  did."  You  have  now  two  sentences. 
"  Which  you  did  "  is  an  adjective  sentence  essential 
to  the  object  and  independent  of  the  verb.  Nothing 
but  an  Indicative  is  required. 

"  Die  mihi  id,  quod  fecisti." 


Besides  the  Adverb  sentence  and  the  Adjective  sen-     §4 
tence  in  its  various  forms,  we  may  also  have  Noun 
sentences  pure  and  simple. 

M  I  do  not  believe — that  he  has  done  it." 

They  stand  for  Subjects  and  Objects.     As  has  already  Noun 
been  explained,  we  have  nothing  to  do  but  express  them, 
and  place  them  in  their  proper  positions  in  the  sentences. 
There  is  no  question  of  subordination  to  the  verb  idea — 
quite  the  reverse. 


170         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

A  simple  tool  for  their  expression  is  the  noun  form  of 
the  verb — the  Infinitive. 

It  cannot  always  be  used,  however,  owing  to  the 
necessity  which  occurs  sometimes  of  emphasising  the 
actors  as  well  as  the  action.  The  Infinitive  will  express 
the  action,  but  it  is  not  a  good  tool  for  the  actors. 

As  the  name  or  description  of  an  action  or  a  state  it 
is  a  noun ;  it  bears  therefore  a  different  relation  to  the 
accessories  or  complementary  ideas  of  that  action  or 
state  (i.e.,  the  Subject  or  the  Object)  from  that  which 
the  ordinary  verb  bears  to  an  ordinary  subject  or  object. 

The  Subject  and  Object  of  an  Infinitive  are  really 
adjectival  to  it — and  subordinate. 

"  Jubet  me  ire."     He  orders  my  going. 

The  Subject  and  Object  of  an  ordinary  Verb  are  not 
adjectival.  The  relation  is  much  more  one  of  equality. 
Otherwise  stated,  an  expressed  or  plainly  appearing 
Subject  is  a  necessity  to  an  ordinary  verb.  It  is  a 
luxury  to  an  Infinitive — mere  supplementary  informa- 
tion about  the  action  noun.  Hence  the  Infinitive  is  an 
appropriate  tool  to  express  a  noun  sentence  in  which 
the  actors  are  of  secondary  importance  only. 

If,  as  sometimes  happens,  they  make  so  little  difference 
to  the  sense  that  they  can  be  left  unexpressed,  the  In- 
finitive is  the  only  appropriate  tool  ;  it  is  a  pure  noun, 
without  an  adjective.     "  Nolo  episcopari." 

If  they  bear  enough  on  the  sense  to  need  expression, 
but  still  are  of  only  secondary  importance,  the  infinitive 
is  still  the  right  tool ;  it  is  a  noun  with  adjective  comple- 
ments in  the  shape  of  its  subject  or  object. 

This  is  the  usual  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  con- 
struction.    "  Dixit  Caesarem  Gallos  vicisse." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  1J1 

As  the  importance  of  the  Infinitive  Subject  to  the  main 
sense  increases,  it  ceases  to  be  able  to  stand  as  an 
adjectival  complement  to  the  Infinitive  noun.  The 
Infinitive  tool  is  abandoned  and  the  Subjunctive  sentence 
adopted.  At  and  near  this  point  either  tool  can  be 
used. 

"  Jubet  me  ire."     He  orders  my  going. 

Going  is  the  thing  which  has  got  to  be  done ;   that  / 
have  got  to  do  it  is  secondary,  but  only  just  so. 
"  Imperavit  mihi  ut  irem." 

That  /  have  got  to  go  is  just  primary. 

The  exact  point  at  which  the  subject  of  the  Infinitive 
ceases  to  be  of  secondary  importance,  and  demands  a 
sentence  of  its  own,  differs  in  different  languages. 
English  practice  differs  from  Latin  considerably.  In 
French  the  two  forms  are  often  actually  alternative  : 
"  II  faut  m'en  aller."  "  II  faut  que  je  m'en  aille." 
"  Avant  d'aller."  "  Avant  que  j'aille."  But  the 
principle  is  the  same  in  all  three  languages.  Whenever 
the  Infinitive  is  used  the  action  is  prominent;  the 
actors  are  in  the  background,  sometimes  more,  some- 
times less,  sometimes  unexpressed  altogether. 


CHAPTER  X. 
THE  SUBJUNCTIVE  MOOD. 

§1  We  have  been  speaking  of  the  connection  between 
ideas  and  the  methods  of  its  expression. 

We  saw  that  the  connections  between  sentences,  i.e., 
between  two  similar  verb  ideas,  are  made  by  Conjunc- 
tions. 

It  has  become  plain  moreover  that  Latin  possesses 
in  addition  a  very  beautiful  and  delicate  tool  for  making 
a  certain  kind  of  these  connections,  viz.,  the  Subjunctive 
Mood. 

English  and  French  have  it  too;  but,  as  usual,  it  is 
most  freely  used  in  Latin,  less  freely  in  French,  and 
hardly  at  all  in  English. 

We  defined  the  Indicative  Mood  as  that  inflection  of 
the  verb  which  expressed  an  action  or  a  state  which 
actually  happened,  or  existed. 

We  defined  the  Subjunctive  as  expressing  an  action 
which  some  one  had  thought  about  or  figured.  The 
definitions  need  some  amplification. 

They  do  not  mean  that  an  action  expressed  by  the 
Subjunctive  never  gets  done.  Because  an  action  is 
thought  about,  that  is  no  reason  why  it  should  not  be 
done  in  due  course ;  nor  again  does  it  mean  that,  once 
it  has  been  done,  it  cannot  be  thought  about  afterwards, 
and  so  in  due  course  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive. 

The  distinction  between  what  we  call  "  fact  "  actions 
and  "  thought-of  "  actions  often  tends  to  be  interpreted 

T72 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  173 

as  the  distinction  between  "  fact  "■  actions  and  "  non- 
fact  "  actions.     This  is  not  correct. 

Actions  get  thought  about  at  three  times  : 

1.  Before  they  are  done. 

2.  While  they  are  being  done. 

3.  After  they  have  been  done. 

At  all  these  times  they  are  expressed  by  the  Sub- 
junctive. 

It  is  quite  easy  to  see  that  they  are  "  thought -of " 
actions,  when  they  are  thought  about  before  they  are 
done  ;  this  is  because  they  have  not  yet  been  done  ; 
they    are   not    yet    facts. 

e.g.,  "  I  hope  he  may  succeed.' " 

It  is  not  so  easy  to  recognise  them  as  "  thought-of  " 
actions  when  they  are  thought  about  after  they  have 
been  done.  In  this  case  you  know  the  action  has 
happened.  This  knowledge  bulks  large  in  your  mind 
and  leads  you  to  lose  sight  of  the  fact  that  it  is  being 
thought  about  as  well. 

e.g.,  '■  I  am  sorry  that  he  did  it." 

The  question  to  ask  yourself  is  not  "  Is  it  a  thought  or 
is  it  a  fact  ?  "  but  "  Is  the  speaker  thinking  about  this  ?  " 

If  so  the  Subjunctive  expresses  his  thought  picture 
of  the  action. 

"  I  am  sorry  that  he  should  have  done  it." 


174         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

§2       Since  the  Subjunctive  describes  not  an  action,  but  the 
Subjunc-    thought  or  mental  image  of  an  action,  the  question 
live  Tenses  arjses  •    Tn  what  sense  does  a  Subjunctive  Mood  possess 
Tenses. 

To  answer  this  question,  Tense  generally  must  be 
studied  more  closely. 

Its  primary  use,  as  you  have  already  learnt,  is  to  add 
to  the  idea  of  an  action  the  idea  of  its  time. 

This  can  be  done  with  perfect  clearness  as  long  as  it 
is  desired  to  speak  of  nothing  further  than  the  action 
and  its  time.     I  write.     I  wrote. 

Often,  however,  other  elements  have  to  be  incorpo- 
rated in  the  Tense.  For  example,  we  need  sometimes, 
to  speak  of  an  action  and  also  of  its  degree  of  complete- 
ness :  and  confusion  arises  because  both  the  action  and 
the  completeness  of  it  take  the  idea  of  time 

There  is  the  question  not  only  of  when  the  action  was 
done,  but  of  when  it  was  complete. 

For  example  : 

"  I  have  written  the  letter  "  expresses  a  past  action 
now  complete. 

The  difficulty  of  naming  such  a  form  is  this.  If  we 
call  it  the  Past  Complete,  we  ignore  the  time  of  the 
completeness.  If  we  call  it  the  Present  Complete,  we 
ignore  the  time  of  the  action.  No  name  will  really 
describe  it,  except  the  full  one  :  "  Past  action  now 
complete." 

Difficulties  become  greater  still  when,  besides  speaking 
of  the  action  and  its  degree  of  completeness,  we  need  to 
speak  of  the  thought  of  it  :  the  thought  takes  the  idea 
of  time,  too  :    it  may  have  been  either  past  thought  or 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         175 

present  thought :  and  we  may  have  accordingly  in 
the  one  form,  ideas  of  when  the  action  was  thought 
about,  of  when  it  was  done,  and  of  when  it  was  complete  : 
and  these  times  need  not  be  all  the  same. 

Single  names,  e.g.,  Present,  or  Perfect,  are  out  of  the 
question  to  describe  such  combinations  accurately. 

Fortunately,  you  can  use  tools  without  so  much 
naming.  You  can  use  names  which  are  merely  dis- 
tinctive :  e.g.,  you  can  call  your  tools  the  X  tool,  and 
the  Y  tool,  and  the  Z  tool,  and  it  will  not  make  the  least 
difference  so  long  as  you  know  the  tools  apart,  and  what 
each  will  do.  This  knowledge  is  a  necessity.  An 
accurately  descriptive  name,  though  desirable,  is  not 
a  necessity.  Proceed,  therefore,  first,  not  to  name  but 
to  analyse  the  Tense  forms  you  use  ;  let  the  names  take 

care  of  themselves  for  a  while. 

1.  I  write  the  letter,  implies  A  present  action 

2.  I  am  writing  the  letter  -     A  present  action  Now  Incomplete 

3.  I  wrote  the  letter  -     A  past  action  <jhe 

4.  I  have  written  the  letter     A  past  action        Now  Complete  Present 

5.  I  was  writing  the  letter  -     A  past  action        Then  Incomplete      and  Pait 

6.  I  had  written  the  letter       A  past  action        Then  Complete        Forms 
Note  that   (1)   and  (3)   are  the  only  single  element 

forms  :  and  that  in  all  the  rest  both  the  action  and  the 
completeness  have  the  idea  of  time. 


With  the  Future  Tenses  a  new  element  enters,  viz.  : 
thought ;  any  action  which  has  not  yet  happened,  if  it 
is  to  be  expressed  at  all,  must  be  figured  or  pictured ; 
nothing  else  is  possible  :  and  such  a  mental  figure  implies 
the  passage  from  the  record  of  an  action  to  the  intelligent 
thought  of  an  action.  A  phonograph  can  record  past 
sounds — only  intelligence  can  figure  future  ones. 


176  THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

In  the  Indicative,  only  actions  are  figured  which  are 
going  to  happen,  either  certainly  or  probably. 

In  the  Subjunctive  they  are  figured  irrespective  of 
whether  they  happen  or  not. 

We  need  the  term  Non-Complete  rather  than  Incom- 
plete to  characterise  figured  actions.  "  Incomplete  " 
implies  they  have  been  begun,  which  implies  they  are 
happening.     This  is  too  large  an  assumption. 

The  difference  between  "  happening "  actions  and 
"  figured  "  actions  is  exactly  like  that  between  things 
and  pictures.  Pictures  may  be  pictures  of  real  things  ; 
or  again,  of  things  which  have  no  existence  outside  the 
artist's  mind.  Figured  actions  may  have  real  ones  to 
correspond  (as  the  Future  Indicatives"*^)),  or  they 
may  be  simply  mental  pictures. 

7.   I  will  write  the  letter,  expresses  Present  Thought  of  a  Future 

Action,  which  is  certain. 
3.   I   would    (i.e.,    willed   to)   write  the  letter,    expresses    Past 
The  Future  Thought  of   a   then   Future   Action  ;    also   reasonably 

Forms  certain. 

Non-Completeness  is  logically  implied  in  the  two 

"  Futures  "  but  is  not  directly  expressed. 

9.   I  will  have  written  the  letter,    expresses  Present  Thought 

of  the  Future  Completion  of  an  Action,  which  is  certain. 

10.   I  would  have  written  the  letter,    Past  Thought  of  the  then 

Future  Completion  of  an  Action,  which  was  also  certain. 

There  are  other  forms  you  should  analyse  for  your- 
selves, e.g.,  "  I  have  been  writing,"  "  I  am  about  to 
write,"  and  so  on.     Those  given  above  are  the  main  ones. 


Again,  nothing  but  an  action  which  happens,  has  time, 
i.e.,  no  merely  figured  action  has  time,  any  more  than  a 
picture  has  time  ;   the  figuring  of  it  has  time,  just  as  a 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


177 


picture  has  a  time  of  painting ;  and  if  the  action 
materialises,  as  it  may  do,  then  the  action  has  time  ; 
but  in  the  Subjunctive  such  materialisation  is  of  secon- 
dary importance.  Hence  we  find  as  we  should  expect 
in  the  Subjunctive  forms  that  the  thought  of  the  action 
and  its  completeness  are  the  main  things  expressed, 
and  that  the  time  of  the  happening,  if  it  happens,  is 
secondary. 

:.  I  may  write  the  letter,  Present  Thought  of 

a    Non-Complete    Action    (which,  if  it  The  Sub- 
happens,  must  be  Future).  junctive 

:.  I    may   have    written    ihe  letter,    Present  Forms 
Thought  of  a  Complete  Action  (which,  if 
it  happened,  must  have  been  in  the  Past). 


It  is  possible 


It  was  suggested 


*3- 


14. 


I  might  write  the  letter,  Past  Thought  of 
a  Non-Complete  Action  (which,  if  it 
happened,  must  have  been  then  in  the 
Future). 

I  might  have  written,  Past  Thought  of  a 
Complete  Action  (which,  if  it  happened, 
must  have  been  then   in  the   Future). 


A  working  distinction  can  be  obtained  among  these 
forms  by  classifying  the  groups  rather  than  naming  the 
individual  forms. 

The  first  and  broadest  distinction  is  clearly  between 
"  happening  "  actions  and  u  figured  "  actions. 

Nos.  1  to  6,  express  actions  which  happen. 

Nos.  7  to  10,  express  actions  which  are  figured  and 
are  going  to  happen. 

Nos.  11  to  14,    express    actions    which    are    simply 
figured. 
L 


§3 


I78         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

There  are  other  forms  besides  those  given,  but  they 
will  all  fall  in  one  or  other  of  the  three  classes 

Nos.  1  to  6.     When  actions  happen  the  time  of  their 
happening  is  a  weightier  idea  than  the  time  of  their 
completeness.     Hence  we  may  classify  : 
Nos.  1  and  2       as  Present  forms, 
Nos.  3,  4,  5,  6,  as  Past  forms, 
the  words  Present  and  Past  referring  to  the  time  of  the 
action. 

If  however  in  No.  4,  "  I  have  written  the  letter," 
it  is  desired  to  emphasise  the  present  completeness, 
No.  4  must  be  classed  as  a  Present  form.  The  form 
does  double  work. 

Nos.  7  to  10  When  actions  -are  figured,  the  time 
of  their  figuring  cannot  be  neglected  ;  nor  when  they 
happen,  as  these  do,  can  the  time  of  their  happening-be 
neglected. 

Hence  Nos.  7  and  9,  may  be  classified  as  the  Present 
Future  group  ;  Nos.  8  and  10,  as  Past  Future  group, 
the  first  word  referring  to  the  time  of  the  thought,  the 
second  to  the  time  of  the  happening. 

Nos.  11  to  14.  Again,  when  actions  are  figured  only, 
they  have  no  time  :  only  the  figuring  has  time. 

Hence  Nos.  n  and  12  may  be  classified  as  Present 
Thought  forms  ;  and  Nos.  13  and  14,  as  Past  Thought 
forms. 

To  summarise,  we  have  to  speak  of : 
Happening  Actions 
and        Figured  Actions. 
Happening    Actions    can    happen    at    three    times, 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         179 

Present,  Past  and  Future  ;  but  if  they  happen  in 
the    future  they  have  to  be  figured,  to  be  expressed. 

Figuring  is  sometimes  done  in  the  present,  sometimes 
in  the  past. 

Actions  which  have  happened  or  are  happening  are 
reconstructed  by  the  mind  and  recorded,  mechanically 
so  to  speak,  by  the  Past  and  Present  forms  of  the 
Indicative. 

Actions  which  are  going  to  happen  are  constructed 
by  the  mind,  and  figured  intelligently  by  the  Future 
Indicative  group  of  forms. 

The  figured  actions  of  the  Subjunctive  (also  intelli- 
gently constructed)  may  or  may  not  have  real  counter- 
parts. They  differ  from  those  of  the  Future  Indicative 
group  as  pictures  differ  from  photographs. 

The  figure  of  an  action  expressed  by  the  Subjunctive 
has  no  time  except  the  time  of  the  figuring  ;  but  in  the 
background  there  is  the  time  of  the  possible  happening 
which  the  Subjunctive  neither  asserts  nor  excludes. 

It  is  now  possible  to  examine  more  closely  the  Sub-     §* 
junctive  Tense  forms. 

In  dealing  with  "  thought  of  or  figured  actions  "  we 
need  to  express  four  main  things  : — 

1.  Present  thought  of  an  action  still  to  be  completed 

(which  in  the  nature  of  things  is  now  in  the 
present  or  the  future). 

2.  Present  thought  of  a  completed    action  (which  in 

the  nature  of  things  is  now  in  the  past). 

3.  Past  thought  of  an  action  which  was  then  still  to  be 

completed  (which  in  the  nature  of  things  was  then 
in  the  present  or  the  future). 


l8o         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

4.     Past  thought  of  a  complete  action  (which  in    the 
nature  of  things  might  then   have  been  in  the 
past  or  the  future. 
Thus  : 

"  I  fear  we  may  arrive  too  late," 
"It  is  possible  he  may  succeed," 
"  Whether  it  be  so  or  no,  I  know  not," 
represent  Present  Thoughts  of  Actions  or  States  still 
to  be  completed. 
But: 

"  I  fear  he  arrived  too  late," 
"  It  is  possible  he  has  succeeded,"  - 
"  Whether  it  has  happened  or  no,  I  know  not," 
all  represent  Present  Thought  of  a  Complete  Action, 
now  past. 
Again  : 

"  I  warned  him  I  should  do  it," 
0  We  hoped  he  might  come," 
"  He  insisted  it  would  be  sufficient," 
all  denote  Past  Thought  of  an  Action  or  State  still  to  be 
completed — and  then  in  the  future  ; 
Whereas  : 

"  I  told  him  I  had  done  it," 

"  It  was  impossible  that  it  should  have  been 

otherwise," 
"  We  thought  it  might  have  sufficed," 
all  represent  Past  Thought  of  Complete  Actions  or  States 
in  the  Past  or  in  the  Future  at  the  time  of  thinking. 

These  four  are  expressed  by  the  Tenses  usually  labelled 
Present,  Perfect,  Imperfect,  and  Pluperfect. 

The  labels  are  inadequate  for  any  purpose  but  that 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


181 


of  distinction.     They   are   taken   from   the   Indicative 
and  are  no  real  guide  to  the  use  of  the  Tenses. 

If  you  re-label  them  at  all  you  must  have  double 
labels  such  as  : 

Present      Non-Complete  (Present) 

Present      Complete  (Perfect) 

Past  Non-Complete  (Imperfect) 

Past  Complete  (Pluperfect) 


Whether  you  use  the  Subjunctive  in  Subconnection,     §5 
or  in  one  of  the  connections  independent  of  the  Verb  The'P    f  gj 
(e.g.,  in  a  noun  object  sentence)  you  are  always  connect-  ffijff^ 
ing  a  figured  or  pictured  action  which  is  secondary,  to 
a  main  or  primary  one. 

It  is  quite  natural  therefore  that  the  time  of  picturing 
the  second  should  correspond  to  the  time  of  the  first. 

What  do  we  mean  by  the  time  of  the  first  ? 

If  the  first  is  a  happening  action  we  mean  the  time 
of  its  happening. 

If  the  first  is  a  pictured  action,  (which  it  may  be — as 
in  the  Futures),  the  natural  time  for  the  second  picture 
is  the  time  of  the  first  picture. 

This  principle  is  much  easier  than  it  looks.  It  may 
be  stated  thus. 

The  time  of  the  first  event,  (if  it  is  a  happening  one), 
determines  the  time  of  your  thought  about  the  second. 


1 82         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

The  time  of  the  thought  of  the  first  event  (if  it  is  a 
pictured  one)  determines  the  time  of  your  thought  about 
the  second. 

Apply  the  principle  as  follows  : 
Caesar  mittit  legatos,  qui  pacem-     ?     Caesar's  sending 

is  present.    Your  thought  is  present.   Present  thought 

of   a   non-complete    action.      Present     Subjunctive. 

Petant. 
Caesar  misit  legatos,  qui  pacem      -     s    Caesar's  sending 

is  past.  Your  thought  is  past.  Past  thought 

of  a  non-complete  action.  Imperfect  Subj.  Peterent. 
Caesar  mittet  legatos,  qui  pacem      -    Caesar's  sending 

is  figured.     The  figure  is  present.     Your  thought  is 

present.     Present  thought  of  a  non-complete  action. 

Petant. 

Or  again : 
Caesar  misit  legatos — may  mean :    Caesar's  sending  is 

now  complete.     The  ambassadors  are  on  the  way. 

The    form    is    present.     Your    thought    is    present. 

Present  thought  of  a  non-complete  action  ;  Qui  pacem 

petant. 

Again : 
Caesar  asked  what  the  ambassadors  had  done.     Caesar's 

asking  was  past.     Your  thought  (which  is  the  Object 

complement  of  "  asked  ")  is  past.     Past  thought  of  a 

complete  action.      Pluperfect — Subjunctive.       Quid 

legati  fecissent. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  183 

Note  how  the  Future  Indicative  Forms  and  the  Sub-     §6 
junctive  Forms  are  related. 

Both  sets  express  figures  of  actions  ;    and  broadly  Relations 
speaking  of  the  same  actions  ;  but  the  Indicative  implies  Future 
that  the  figures  will  materialise  ;    the  Subjunctive  says  ^°rmshand 
nothing  one  way  or  the  other.  junctive 

It  is  manifest  that  where  the  chance  of  an  action  Forms 
happening  is  very  strong,  it  will  tend  to  push  the  method 
of  expression  towards  the  Indicative,  though  the  Sub- 
junctive may  still  be  strictly  correct ;  in  other  words 
the  Indicative  will  be  used  to  express  not  only  actions 
which  will  certainly  happen,  but  which  will|probably 
happen. 

Hence  when  JEnglishT]or  any  other  language  says, 
'*  I  hope  he  will  come,"  rather  than  "  I  hope  he  may 
come  "  no  laws  are  violated,  and  there  is  no  sudden  change 
of  practice  ;  all  that  happens  is  that  the  more  accurate 
and  delicate  tool,  the  Present  Subjunctive,  is  laid  down, 
and  the  next  in  the  range,  the  Future  Indicative,  is  taken 
up.  The  word  does  nearly  as  well.  It  is  less  subtle  but 
more  direct.  The  emphasis  shifts  from  the  thought 
side  of  the  action  to  its  fact  side. 

More  than  this,  English  methods  of  expression 
habitually  incline  to  the  fact  side  of  actions  rather  than 
to  the  thought  side.| 

e.g.,  "  Whether  it  is  so  or  not,  I  do  not  know," 
would  probably  be  preferred  to  the  formally  correct  form. 

"  Whether  it  be  so  or  not,  I  do  not  know." 
The  first  sentence  means.     Either  it  is  so  ;   or  it  is  not 
so  ;    I  do  not  know  which.     It  deals  with  facts  only. 

It  is  by  such  steps  as  these  that  in  English  the  Indica- 
tive has  come  to  supplant  the  Subjunctive. 


184         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Compare  : 

r<  I  wish  he  were  here,"    (a  true  Subjunctive), 
"  I  wish  he  was  here." 
The  first  sentence  is  good  English,  the  second  is  not  ; 
and  the  reason  is  because  "  the  wishing  "  implies  that 
"  his  being  here  "  is  not  a_fact  ;    hence  the  use  of  the 
Fact  Mood  jars  on  the  ear. 
Compare  again  : 

•  I  thought  he  was  here," 
as  opposed  to    "I  thought  he  were  here." 

Precisely  the  opposite  is  the  case  in  this  example  ; 
the  word  thought  (which  is  equivalent  to  believed)  ex- 
presses a  presumption  in  favour  of  his  being  here  being 
a  fact,  and  makes  the  fact  side  an  appropriate  one  to 
dwell  on. 

In  French,  far  less  freedom  is  taken,  and  in  Latin  none 
at  all. 

"  Je  croyais  qu'il  fut  ici  " 
"  Credidi  eum  adesse." 


The  Tense  usually  called  the  Conditional  in  the  French 
Indicative  is  interesting. 

It  bears  exactly  the  same  relation  to  the  Tense  usually 
called  the  Imperfect  Subjunctive  that  the  Future  In- 
dicative bears  to  the  Present  Subjunctive. 
Just  as  : 

"  I  will  go  "  denotes  a  present  thought  of  an  action 
still  to  be  completed,  with  the 
idea  of  its  happening  pre- 
dominant. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         185 

and  : 

"  I  may  go  "  denotes    a  present  thought  of  an  action 
still  to  be  completed,  with  the 
idea  of  "  thought  "  predomi- 
nant. 
So: 

"  I  would  go  "  denote     a  past  thought  of  an  action 
"  I  should  go  "  still  to  be  completed,  with  the 

idea   of   its    happening   pre- 
dominant, 
and : 

"  I  might  go  "  denotes  a  past  thought  of  an  action 
still  to  be  completed,  with  the 
idea  of  thought  predominant. 


Note  finally,  the  connection  between  the  Infinitive     §7 
and  the  Subjunctive. 

The   Infinitive   freely  expresses   the   thought   of   an  Relations 
action  ;  in  fact  it  is  usually  wanted  for  this  rather  than  J^infjni- 
to  express  the  action  itself.  tiveandthe 

The  limitation  of  the  Infinitive,   as  was  previously  ?."^unc" 
explained,  is  that  its  Subject  and  Object  (being  adjectival 
to  the  verb   noun)   are  very  secondary  in  the  main 
sentence — and   the   sense   does  not   always   permit  of 
their  being  thus  lowered  in  value. 

But  when  English  says  : 

"  He  sent  messengers  to  beg  for  peace," 
and  Latin  says  : 

"  Misit  legatos,  ut  pacem  peterent," 
there   is  no   radical   difference   of  practice.     The   two 


1 86         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

forms  adjoin.  "  The  seekers "  are  expressed  in  the 
Subjunctive,  they  are  taken  for  granted  in  the  In- 
finitive. 

The  real  choice  is  not  between  two  dissimilar  tools,  the 
Subjunctive  and  the  Infinitive  ;  they  are  not  dissimilar, 
it  is  rather  between  the  full  Adverbial  Sentence  which 
defines  its  subject,  and  the  condensed  Adverbial  Phrase 
which  omits  it. 

For  further  examples  of  the  use  of  the  Subjunctive 
Tenses,  see  Chapter  XII. 


CHAPTER    XL 

THE    BASIS    OF    CONNECTION. 

We  saw,  when  investigating  connection,  that  certain     §1 
words   can   only   be   connected   with   great   difficulty, 
because  the  things  or  ideas  they  represent  are  only 
connected  at  a  great  distance. 

Again,  other  words  are  quite  easy  to  connect,  because 
the  things  they  represent  are  quite  closely  connected. 

This  is  true  not  only  of  the  similar  ideas,  i.e.,  of  the 
similar  noun  ideas  or  adjective  ideas  or  verb  ideas 
(sentences)  which  we  habitually  connect  by  Conjunctions, 
but  of  all  ideas  that  we  ever  link  by  any  means  whatever, 
e.g.,  by  Case,  by  Order  or  by  anything  else. 

Subject- Verb,  Adjective-Noun  are  examples  of  such 
connections,  and  you  cannot  make  them  as  you  will. 

e.g.,  Self-sacrificing  is  an  inappropriate  adjective 
for  a  cabbage. 

Butterfly  is  an  impossible  subject  for  shouted. 

On  the  other  hand  toothsome  will  connect  with  cabbage, 
without  difficulty. 

Find  for  yourself  a  suitable  verb  for  butterfly. 

You  can  see  from  this  that  ideas  must  have  some 
common  ground  before  you  connect  them.  That  there 
was  so  little  was  the  reason  of  your  difficulty  in  connect- 
ing whale  and  inflection. 

Now  the  way  connection  is  made  is  always  the  same  ; 
the  common  ground  is  found  and  then  expressed. 

You  will  find  that  the  tools  by  which  this  expression 
187 


l88         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

is  done  are  of  various  sorts.     The  amount  of  common 

ground  varies  ;   some  pairs  of  ideas  have  a  bare  inch  of 

it,  other  pairs  have  a  foot,  others  an  acre,  others  are 

almost  all  common  ground. 

The  Tools       Now  you  connect  with  great  ease,  so  much  so,  that  you 

similar        are  Per^ectly  unconscious  of  the  process,  those  pairs  of 

Connec-      ideas  that  have  much  common  ground.     Such  pairs  are 

Verb  and  Subject,  Verb  and  Adverb,  Verb  and  Objects, 

Nouns  and  Adjectives. 

Examine  such  a  connection.     Take  the  words  : 
Dog    the    shot    keeper    my. 

They  are  now  disconnected.  Watch  the  steps  of 
connection. 

What  is  the  first  ?     Put  them  in  order. 

Very  well,  write  them  in  any  order  you  please.  You 
say  : 

"  My  keeper  shot  the  dog." 

Is  that  all  ?     Yes. 

Very  well,  write  my  on  one  sheet  of  paper,  write 
keeper  on  another,  and  so  on. 

Arrange  the  sheets  of  paper  one  above  another  as  the 
words  come.     They  are  still  in  order. 

Are  they  properly  connected  ?     No. 

What  is  necessary  ?  We  must  have  all  the  words  in 
order  on  the  same  sheet  of  paper. 

Two  things  have  to  be  done.  First,  they  have  to  be 
collected  together  ;  Second,  they  have  to  be  placed  in 
order. 

Two  tools  have  to  be  used,     (i)  Proximity.     (2)  Order. 

Proximity  has  been  used  to  denote  that  the  words  are 
connected,  order  has  been  used  to  say  exactly  how. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         189 

Both  these  tools  were  wanted  for  the  connection.  The 
order  tool  as  you  saw,  was  not  of  the  slightest  use  with- 
out the  other. 

If  it  were  Latin,  we  should  use  the  Case  and  Person 
tools  instead  of  the  Order  tool. 

Should  we  use  the  proximity  tool  ? 

Is  Puer  amat  dominum  any  use  on  separate  sheets  of 
paper  ? 

Work  out  for  yourselves  the  tools  for  connecting 
adjective  and  noun,  verb  and  adverb. 

We  shall  see  finally  that  these  pairs  of  ideas  require  to 
connect  them  first,  the  use  of  the  proximity  tool,  secondly 
the  use  of  one  or  other  of  these  tools,  Order,  Case  or 
Preposition. 

You  will  remember  how  Case  in  one  language  was 
replaced  by  Order  in  another,  or  again,  how  sometimes 
Cases  are  replaced  by  Prepositions. 

It  is  another  sign  that  these  tools  are  all  doing  the 
same  work. 

To  sum  up,  proximity  connects,  the  other  tool  ex- 
presses the  exact  connection. 


Now  all  these  connections  are  made  between  ideas,     §2 
which,  though  of  a  different  nature,  have  a  great  deal 
in  common.     They  are  like  the  connections  which  exist 
between   the   different   members   of  a  family,    father, 
mother,  daughters,  and  so  on. 

You  make  hundreds  of  such  connections  daily. 

They  are  not,  however,  the  only  connections  which 
exist  and  have  to  be  expressed.     The  father  of  a  family 


190         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

is  not  only  connected  with  his  daughter,  who  is  close  to 
him,  but  unlike  himself,  but  he  may  also  have  business 
relations  with  the  father  of  another  family  like  himself, 
but  not  in  the  least  closely  related. 

In  precisely  the  same  way  connections  have  to  be 
made  between  pairs  of  ideas  which  are  alike  but  which 
have  a  good  deal  less  in  common  than  the  pairs 
above. 

The  commonest  of  such  cases  is  the  connection  which 
has  to  be  made  between  sentences,  i.e.,  between  pairs 
of  verb  ideas. 

You  make  hundreds  of  these  connections  also  every- 
day. You  can  no  more  tell  a  story,  or  describe  an 
incident,  or  carry  on  a  conversation  by  means  of  one 
single  sentence  followed  by  no  others,  than  you  can 
say  a  sentence  with  one  single  word.  If  you  do  not 
believe  it,  try  the  effect  of  allowing  yourself  a  conversa- 
tion of  one  sentence  only  with  each  member  of  your 
family  during  next  dinner-time.  See  how  much  news 
you  can  tell  them. 

Before  we  examine  the  tools  by  which  such  connections 
are  made,  it  is  well  to  look  for  a  moment  at  the  reason 
we  make  them. 
The  Basis       By  what  right  do  we  connect  two  sentences,  i.e.,  two 

connec-      ver^  ^eas  at  a^  ?     As  we  saw  above,  because  the  two 
tion  ideas  have  some  common  ground. 

What  is  it  ?     It  depends  on  what  the  two  sentences 

mean.     Some  states  or  events  (which  are  the  ideas  all 

sentences  express)  have  more  in  common  than  others. 

There  is,  however,  one  bit  of  common  ground  by  which 

any  pair  of  verb  ideas,  i.e.,  any  two  sentences  may  be 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         191 

connected,  viz.  :   that  they  happen  in  the  same  portion 

of  time,  i.e.,  that  they  are  contemporaneous. 

What  happened  on  Tuesday  ?  Contempor- 

„%,  ,.    ,  ,,  aneousness 

The  cow  died, 

'-  The  House  of  Lords  was  abolished." 
"  I  caught  a  four  pound  bream." 
These  ideas  are  quite  different.     They  have  hardly 
any  common  ground. 

The  one  and  only  scrap  that  they  have  is  that  they 
all  happened  in  one  particular  period. 
We  use  the  proximity  tool  to  express  this. 
When  we  place  such  sentences  close  to  one  another 
in  a  story,  or  a  conversation,  or  anywhere  else,  we  mean 
something. 

We  mean  to  say  the  events  they  express  are  contem- 
poraneous. 

Contemporaneousness  is  a  word  that  may  frighten 
you.  It  means  that  they  are  enclosed  in  a  particular 
period  of  time.  We  will  express  it  in  future  by£saying 
proximity  of  sentences  denotes  that  the  events  are  in 
a  time  box.  f\ 

(1).     They  may  need  a  very  big  time  box.  ^  The  Work 

"  Queen  Anne  died.     England  adopted  Free  Trade."  oIdinateC°~ 
These  have  almost  no  connection  at  all.  Conjunc- 

(2).     Some  will  hardly  go  into  a  time  box  at  all.  tions 

"  Noah  built  an  Ark.     I  bought  a  new  umbrella." 
(3).     Some  are  in  the  time  box  at  opposite  ends. 
"  I  caught  a  four  pound  bream.      The  House  of 
Lords  was  abolished." 
The  time  box  is  shown  by  proximity,  and  the  separation 
of  the  ideas  by  the  separation  of  the  sentences,  i.e.,  by 
the  full  stop. 


192         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

(4).  Some  are  in  the  time  box,  a  good  way  apart, 
in  order. 

"  Veni.     Vidi.     Vici." 
The  tools  we  use  to  express    this    connection    are 
proximity  for  the  time  box,  full  stops  for  the  separation, 
Order  of  the  sentences  for  the  order  of  the  events. 
(5).     Some  are  in  the  time  box  close  together. 

"  He  is  good  and  he  is  kind." 
The  tools  are  proximity  for  the  time  box,  "  and  "  to 
express  the  closeness. 

(6).     Some  are  in  the  time  box,  close,  and  in  order. 
"  He  gave  me  sixpence  and  told  me  not  to 
spend  it  all  at  once." 
The  tools  are  proximity,  "  and  ",  and  order. 
(7).     Some  are  in  the  time  box,  in  order,  and  mutually 
opposite. 

"  I  went  but  I  did  not  see  him." 
The  tools  are  proximity,  order,  and  "  but." 
(8).     Some  are  in  the   time  box  very  close  and   in 
order. 

"  It  was  raining,  so  I  took  an  umbrella." 
The  tools  are  proximity,  "so,"  and  order. 
(9).     Some  are  in  the  time  box,  and  simultaneous. 

"  I  saw  him  as  I  was  leaving." 
The  tools  are  proximity  and  "as."    The  only  order 
here  is  that  of  importance  of  ideas. 

Similar  tools  are  "  for "  (Simultaneous  with  one 
event  of  major  importance)  ;  "  though  "  (Simultaneous 
but  incompatible)  ;  "  or  "  (One  or  other  in  the  time 
box,  but  not  both). 

You  can  now  see  what  the  words  and,  but,  or,  etc.,  which 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  1 93 

are  usually  called  Co-ordinate  Conjunctions,  do.  They 
help  two  other  tools,  viz.  :  proximity  and  order,  to 
make  a  certain  kind  of  connection  between  two  verb 
ideas.  The  connections  are  all  contemporaneous  con- 
nections— time  box  connections. 

The  words  are  doing  exactly  the  same  work  when  they 
stand  between  nouns. 

"  I  bought  a  horse  and  a  sheep,"  only  means : 
"  I  bought  a  horse  and  I  bought  a  sheep." 

The  common  ground  is  time  box,  closeness,  order  of 
events. 

The  tools  for  its  expression  are  Proximity,   "  and," 
and  order  of  sentences. 

All  events  that  have  ever  happened  have  some  time 
connections   with   one   another,  and   consequently  can 
be   described   by    sentences   connected    on    the    time 
box  principle  ;    but  just  as  a  pair  of  distant  events  are 
not  connected  directly,  but  by  a  series  of  intermediate 
events,  so  the  sentences  which  express  them  will  need 
intermediate  sentences  to  connect  them.     A  story  is  the 
description  of  such  a  set  of  events. 
"  Noah  built  an  ark," 
"  I  bought  a  new  umbrella," 
might  be  the  first  and  last  sentences  of  such  a  story. 
They  are  in  the  time  box  after  all.     It  is  not  for  nothing 
that  the  tale  begins  with  "  Once  upon  a  time." 


As  you  have  seen,  time  box  connections  can  be  very  §3 
slight  indeed,  almost  nothing  but  the  time  box  some- 
times.    On  the  other  hand  they  can  be  very  much 
M 


194         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

closer.     Two  events  can  have  a  good  deal  in  common 
besides  the  time  box. 

Suppose  that  two  such  events  happen  close  together 
with  a  good  deal  more  common  ground  than  their  mere 
time  connection,  e.g.,  "  rain  jailing  "  and  "  Mr.  Smith 
taking  his  umbrella."  There  is  the  common  ground  of 
time  ;  there  is  also  the  common  ground  that  they  are 
both  component  parts  of  one  main  incident. 

We  have  to  express  these  events.  To  do  this  we  must 
do  one  or  other  of  two  things. 

i.  We  may  take  the  connection  which  is  there,  ready 
made,  between  the  two  events — the  time  box  connection. 
In  this  case  we  simply  record  the  events  as  they  happen, 
with  any  further  common  ground  there  may  be  of  order, 
or  of  closeness,  or  of  anything  else. 

We  use  proximity,  order,  and  the  co-ordinate  con- 
junctions as  our  tools.  The  three  between  them  ex- 
press the  connection. 

"  It  was  raining  heavily  and  Mr.  Smith  took 
his  umbrella." 
Time  box,  order,   closeness. 

"  It  was  raining  heavily,  so  Mr.  Smith  took 
his  umbrella/ ' 
Time  box,   order,   very  close. 

This  connection  is  the  only  one  possible  for  some 

events,  viz.  :    those  with  very  little  common  ground. 

It  is  our  old  friend  equi-connection  in  another  dress. 

^ne     .  2.     When  there  is  plenty  of  common  ground  we  may, 

of  Sub-       if  we  choose,  forsake  the  time  box  connection  altogether 

connection  an(j  connect  on  the  other  part  of  the  common  ground, 

which  is  that  the  two  events  are  both  part  of  one  large 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  1 95 

event,   just  as  two  words  are   part  of  one  sentence. 
This  is  our  old  friend  sub-connection  and  involves, 
what  the  time  box  connection  does  not,  a  deliberate 
choice  on  your  part. 

The  first  time  you  record  the  events  and  leave  them 
as  they  happened.  You  express  them  of  course  the 
second  time,  but  also  you  take  them  out  of  the  time  box 
altogether  and  give  them  another  connection.  This 
involves  thought.  The  first  time  you  were  a  phono- 
graph ;   the  second  time  you  are  a  composer. 

As  long  as  you  are  recording  you  use  the  recording 
tool — the  Indicative  Mood;  the  moment  you  compose, 
i.e.,  think  of  an  event  rather  than  record  it,  you  use  the 
tool  which  expresses  the  thought  of  action — the  Sub- 
junctive. 

"  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella.  (I  will  tell  you  why  ; 
it  was)  because  it  was  raining." 

Hence  in  Sub-connection  the  main  event  is  recorded — 
(Indicative) — the  other  is  thought  about  as  its  adjunct — 
(Subjunctive) — and  connected  with  it. 

i.     By  proximity.  The  Tools 

2.  By  suitable  order  (which  is  not  the  time  order),  connection 

3.  By  the  subordinate  conjunctions. 

Note  that  the  time  idea  has  dropped  out  of  sight. 
You  cannot  interchange. 

"  They  caught  him  and  cut  his  throat," 
because  the  events  only  happened  one  way,  and  you  have 
to  record  them  that  wa}'. 
You  can  interchange  : 

"  After  they  had  caught  him  they  cut  his  throat." 
You  are  no  longer  bound  to  time. 


I96         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

§4        Note   the   place   where  equi-connection   merges   into 
sub-connection. 

When  events  in  the  time  box  become  simultaneous, 
as  they  may,  it  is  clear  they  are  likely  to  have  consider- 
able common  ground,  and  that  sub-connection  is  possible 
and  natural. 

"It  was  raining,  so  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella." 
So  means  very  close  in  the  time  box.     This  is  a  true 
equi-connection  and  cannot  be  reversed,  but  examine  : 
"  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella,  as  it  was  raining." 
"  It  was  raining.     Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella." 
"  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella.     It  was  raining." 
"It  was  raining  as  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella." 
These  are  all  time  box  connections,  records  of  events 
merely.     The  reversals  are  only  due  to  the  fact  that  the 
events  are  simultaneous  and  so  have  no  order. 

You  have  a  kind  of  choice,  however  ;  you  have  to 
choose  which  event  you  will  record  first,  i.e.,  which  you 
regard  as  the  most  important.  Though  they  are  still 
records,  it  is  the  beginning  of  the  mental  process  which 
ends  in  your  taking  them  out  of  the  time  box  and  saying  : 
"  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella  because  it  was  raining." 
The  two  conjunctions  which  are  nearest  the  border 
line  are  for  and  though. 

They  both  express  the  time  box  connections  between 
two  events  of  which  one  is  of  major  importance. 
"  Mr.  Smith  left  his  umbrella  at  home — though 

it  was  raining." 
"  Mr.  Smith  took  his  umbrella — for  it  was  raining." 
The  step  from  such  forms  as  these  (which  say  that  one 
event  is  of  greater  importance  than  the  other)  to  sub- 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  I97 

connection  (which  say  the  second  is  a  part  of  the  first) 
is  almost  imperceptible. 

Hence  in  Latin,  quamquam,  an  equi-connecting 
conjunction  with  the  Indicative,  means  practically  the 
same  as  quant  vis  a  sub-connecting  one  with  the  Sub- 
junctive. Similarly  in  German  denn,  on  the  one  side  of 
the  line  touches  weil  on  the  other,  and  so  on. 


It  follows,  therefore,  that  if  two  events  adjoin,  you     §5 
have  various  forms  of  expression  open  to  you. 

1.  You  may  record  them  in  equi-connection.  Provi- 
dence connects  them  in  time,  all  you  have  to  do  is  to 
render  that  connection  faithfully. 

2.  You  may  connect  them  yourself,  (always  assuming 
there  is  sufficient  common  ground  for  this).  You 
record  the  main  event  and  express  your  idea  of  the  con- 
nection (i.e.,  your  thought  about  the  second  event)  by 
means  of  the  appropriate  tools — a  Subordinate  con- 
junction and  the  Subjunctive  Mood  ;  in  this  case  you 
have  chosen  the  adverbial  form  for  the  second  event. 

Or,  again,  you  may  do  the  same  thing,  choosing  not 
an  adverbial  form  but  an  adjectival  one,  i.e.,  you  may 
hang  your  second  event  not  directly  on  to  the  main 
one  but  to  one  of  the  actors  in  the  main  one.  The 
Subjunctive  will  still  be  used  and  there  will  still  be  a 
subordinate  conjunction  contained  in  the  relative 
pronoun. 

3.  The  second  event  may  not  be  a  real  adjunct  of  the 
first,  but  a  mere  adjunct  only  of  an  actor  in  the  first. 
There  is  no  serious  connection  in  this  case  between  the 


10,8         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

first  and  the  second.  All  that  is  required  is  to  express 
the  second  with  the  Indicative  as  your  normal  tool, 
and  place  it  in  connection  with  the  actor. 

4.  The  second  event  or  state  may  be  such  that  it  is 
not  a  mere  adjunct  of  the  actor  only,  but  in  practice  the 
description  of  the  actor  himself.  It  has  become  the 
actor.  In  such  a  case,  all  you  have  to  do  is  to  express 
it  as  before,  and  place  it  in  its  proper  connection  with 
the  verb. 

The  connection  is  made  entirely  by  placing  and  has 
nothing  to  do  with  (1)  and  (2),  which  are  connections  of 
a  sentence  with  a  sentence  ;  this  is  a  connection  of  a 
word  with  a  verb — inside  a  sentence. 


CHAPTER    XII. 

The  following  illustrations  will  make  clear  the  appli-  Some 
cation  of   the   principles   laid   clown   in   the   preceding  Applied- 
chapters,  tions 

Remember  that  the  analysis  is  not  an  analysis  of  the 
words  and  forms,  but  of  the  thoughts  which  underlie 
them. 

Do  not  say  :  This  speaker  uses  an  Indicative  or  a 
Subjunctive  Mood — therefore  the  form  is  in  a  mysterious 
relationship  called  Equi-connection  or  Sub-connection 
as  the  case  may  be  :  therefore  use  Indicative  or  Sub- 
junctive in  all  languages. 

Say  rather  :  This  speaker  wishes  to  express  two  events 
independently  of  each  other.  Hence  he  connects  them 
on  equal  terms.  He  uses  appropriate  tools  to  do  it, — 
very  often  a  pair  of  Indicative  forms.  The  Subjunctive 
is  not  in  the  least  excluded,  if  it  is  wanted. 

Or  again  :  This  speaker  wishes  to  express  one  event 
with  a  second  as  an  adjunct.  Hence  he  connects  them, 
with  the  second  event  subordinate.  He  uses  the  ap- 
propriate tools  again  :  usually  a  Subjunctive  form  for 
the  second. 

It  does  not  follow  that  because  one  man  habitually 
uses  a  tool  for  a  certain  purpose,  another  will  use  the 
same  one.  Latin  regularly  uses  the  Subjunctive  in  the 
course  of  making  Sub -connections.  English  makes 
many  of  them  by  the  Indicative,  without  the  least  loss 
of  clearness.  "  He  will  not  succeed,  however  strong 
he  is." 

199 


200         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Hence  in  this  as  in  many  other  instances,  the  two 
languages  say  the  same  thing  by  means  of  different 
forms.  Study  the  thing — and  not  the  English  form  :  in 
the  study  of  the  thing,  you  will  find  the  key  to  both 
sets  of  forms  ;  and  the  differences  of  practice  which  you 
will  discover,  will  be,  as  they  should  be,  so  many  revela- 
tions of  the  working  of  the  English  or  the  Roman  mind. 
On  the  other  hand,  if  you  do  not  go  behind  the  words, 
to  the  sense,  but  merely  transfer  the  words,  or  the  com- 
binations from  one  language  to  another,  your  work  is 
mechanical  and  unintelligent — and  every  difference  in 
practice  between  the  two  languages  becomes  a  pitfall. 
It  is  true  you  may  fence  the  worst  pitfalls  round  with 
cautions  and  rules.  For  example  :  "  Purpose  "  in  Latin 
is  not  expressed  by  an  Infinitive  as  in  English,  but  by 
ut  or  qui  with  a  Subjunctive.  Nevertheless,  the  truth  is, 
you  ought  not  to  be  on  the  road  at  all.  If  you  took  such 
sentences  to  pieces,  you  would  discover  that  both  English 
and  Latin  are  saying  the  same  thing — English  by  the 
use  of  an  Adverbial  Phrase  (made  out  of  the  Verb  noun, 
the  Infinitive),  Latin  by  the  use  of  a  sub-connected 
Adverbial  Sentence.  Such  a  fact  ought  not  to  be  a 
trap,  but  a  highly  interesting  discovery, 
i.     He  waited  so  long,  that  he  lost  his  train. 

The  second  sentence  is  adverbial.  It  bears  on 
the  "  waited  long,"  which  is  the  real  assertion  of 
the  first  sentence.  Sub-connection.  In  strictness 
Subjunctive.  Past  thought  of  a  complete  action. 
Perfect  Tense. 
2.     The  poor  child  was  weeping,  as  he  ran. 

An  instance  of  Equi-connection  tending  towards 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  201 

Sub-connection.  He  ran  along  and  cried.  He  cried 
and  ran.  Not  sufficient  predominance  of  either 
idea  for  Sub-connection  :    two  indicatives. 

3.  Tell  him  to  come  and  speak  to  me. 

A  replacing  phrase.  Object  of  "  tell."  You 
cannot  tell  a  real  action — only  the  "  tale  "  of 
one.  The  object  is  the  thought  of  an  action ; 
expressed  by  Infinitives  in  English.  In  French 
"  Dites  lui  qu'il  vienneme  trouver."  A  Subjunctive 
sentence. 

4.  We  ran  till  we  were  dead  heat. 

If  it  is  desired  to  say  :  "  We  ran  till  the  point, 
at  which  we  were  dead  beat."  The  second  sen- 
tence is  adjectival — and  describes  "  point."  It  is 
in  Equi-connection  and  needs  an  Indicative. 

But  if  the  sentence  means  "  We  ran  so  fast  and 
so  far  that  we  were  dead  beat,"  i.e.,  if  the  "  dead 
beat  "  is  to  be  connected  with  "  the  running,"  the 
second  sentence  is  in  Adverbial  Sub-connection 
and  requires  in  strictness  a  Subjunctive.  A  past 
thought  of  a  complete  state  is  indicated — hence 
Pluperfect. 

5.  Clever  as  he  is  he  is  not  always  right. 

The  first  sentence  limits  the  verb  of  the  second 
and  is  adverbial  to  it.  Sub-connection.  Sub- 
junctive. M  Clever  as  he  may  be."  "  Quelle 
que  soit  son  adresse  .  .  "  Present  thought  of 
a  non-complete  state.     Present  Subjunctive. 

6.  He  could  see  well,  althotigh  he  was  old. 

The  second  sentence  like  all  "  although  "  sen- 
tences is  on  the  margin  between  adverbial  sub- 


202         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

connection  and  equi-connection.  The  two  types 
are  :  He  could  see  well  in  spite  of  his  age — and 
He  could  see  well ;  yet  he  was  old. 

Both  forms  are  possible,  according  to  the  shade 
of  meaning  desired.  Latin  quamquam  and  In- 
dicative. Equi-connection,  Quamvis  and  Sub- 
junctive, Sub-connection.  French  prefers  Sub- 
connection,  to  which  on  the  whole  the  sense  leans. 
"Quoique"  and  "bien  que"  both  with  Subjunctives. 
English  has  both.  "  I  can  see  well,  old  as  I  am," 
or  "  I  can  see  well,  old  though  I  may  be." 

7.  He  failed  because  he  took  no  precautions. 

A  similar  combination  to  the  last  one.  "  Be- 
cause "  sentences  are  on  the  margin  like  "  although" 
sentences. 

Equi-connection  says,  He  failed.  He  took 
no  precautions.  Two  blunt  records  of  fact  are 
presented.  The  work  of  interpreting  their  re- 
lation is  left  to  the  listener. 

Sub-connection  says :  He  failed,  and  in  my 
opinion  it  was  because  ....  The  speaker  is 
responsible  for  the  interpretation  of  the  relation- 
ship. 

8.  It  will  dry  if  it  is  exposed  to  the  air. 

As  it  stands  in  English  with  its  two  indicatives 
it  expresses  a  time  sequence.  Expose  it.  It  will 
dry.  An  example  of  equi-connection.  The 
listener  is  to  draw  the  inference.  But  when  the 
speaker  draws  the  inference  :  It  would  dry,  if  it 
were  exposed  to  the  air.  Sub-connection  and  the 
Subjunctive  ;  or  keeping  the  time  unchanged : 
It  will  dry,  if  it  be  exposed  to  the  air. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  203 

9.     They  little  knew  what  he  had  done. 

Main  verb  one  of  mentality.  Object  a  noun 
combination,  (not  a  noun  sentence),  expressing 
the  figure  of  an  action.  Subjunctive  strictly.  Past 
thought  of  a  complete  action.     Pluperfect. 

10.  They  little  knew  the  mischief,  which  he  had  caused. 

In  this  case  the  second  sentence  is  not  the 
object,  but  adjectival  to  the  object.  It  is  in 
Equi-connection  and  needs  an   Indicative. 

11.  Men  stop  work  if  they  don't  get  paid. 

The  second  sentence  is  really  an  adjective 
sentence  dominating  the  Subject.  "  Non-paid 
men  stop  work."  Compare :  "  Men,  who  are 
industrious,  thrive."  The  sentence  is  more  than 
an  adverb — it  is  a  part  of  the  subject.  It  merely 
needs  expression.  There  is  nothing  in  the  verb 
"  stop  M  to  call  for  the  thought  of  an  action  as  its 
Subject5  Complement.     Hence  an  Indicative. 

The  same  result  can  be  reached  from  another 
point  of  view.  Men  don't  get  paid  (this  happens) 
and  they  stop  work  (this  happens  too).  It  is 
a  pure  time  sequence.  Equi-connection  and  two 
indicatives.  "  He  broke  his  leg,  and  was  carried 
home  on  a  stretcher."  is  an  exactly  similar 
sequence. 

12.  Men  would  stop  work  if  they  didn't  get  paid. 

Adverbial  Sub-connection.  Subjunctive.  Past 
thought  of  a  complete  action.  \ 

Tense  in  the  first  sentence  to  denote  past  thought 
of  a  non-complete  action,  with  the  idea  of  its 
happening  predominating. 


204         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

13.  All  that  glitters  is  not  gold. 

An  adjective  sentence  which  is  part  of  the  Subject 
Sentence.  No  mentality  in  "is  not  gold."  In- 
dicative only  needed. 

14.  I  am  not  surprised  at  what  you  tell  me. 

i.e.,  at  something.  "  What  you  tell  me"  is  a 
magnified  noun.  "  At  what  you  tell  me"  is 
an  Adverb  Phrase.  Its  connection  is  that  of  a 
single  word  Adverb,  not  of  an  Adverb  Sentence. 
Order  and  expression  needed.     Indicative. 

15.  Who  steals  my  purse,  steals  trash. 

"  Who  "  is  a  compound  relative.  "  Who  steals 
my  purse,"  a  noun  combination,  and  the  subject. 
There  is  nothing  in  "  steals  "  to  demand  a  thought 
subject.  Indicative,  "  Bis  dat  qui  cito  dat  " 
is  a  similar  case. 

But  compare  the  alternative  method  of  ex- 
pressing the  same  thing  : 

"  If  a  man  steal  my  purse,  he  steals  trash."     Which 
is  a  Subjunctive  in  Sub-connection. 

The  two  methods  are  very  easily  confused. 
The  secret  of  the  compound  relative  form  is  that 
the  relative  sentence  merges  in  the  antecedent, 
and  not  in  the  verb  as  in  Sub-connection. 

16.  The  depth  was  greater  than  I  expected. 

"  Greater  than  I  expected "  is  an  adjective 
combination,  in  exactly  the  same  way  that  the 
compound  relative  combination  is  a  noun.  Express 
it  and  place  it.  Do  not  separate  "  than  I  ex- 
pected "  and  infer  Sub-connection. 
"  The  depth  is  greater  than  you  may  think." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         205 

The  same  thing  :    with  the  Subjunctive  used  to 
express  a  figured  standard,  not  an  actually  formu- 
lated one. 
17.     Order  him  to  get  the  carnage  ready. 

An  Object,  The  thought  or  figure  of  an  action. 
Expressed  by  an  Infinitive  Phrase  :  or  alternatively 
by  a  Subjunctive  Sentence.  Note  the  time  con- 
nections in  the  latter  case  between  "  order  "  and 
"  get  ready."  "  Order  "  is  an  Imperative — and, 
like  the  Future  and  Subjunctive  forms,  a  figure 
of  an  action.  The  time  of  the  first  figure  is 
present — so  must  the  time  of  the  second  figure  be. 
Present  thought  of  a  Non-complete  action. 

Note  the  relationship  that  the  Analysis  of  the 
Imperative  shows  between  it  and  the  other  forms 
which  express  figures  of  actions. 
Indicative  Futures — 

Present   and  Past   figures   of  actions  which  will 
happen. 
Imperative — 

Present  figures  of  actions  which  it  is  desired  shall 
happen. 
Subjunctive — 

Present  and  Past  figures  of  actions  irrespective  of 
their  happening. 
18.     Buy  a  new  hat,  before  you  come  back. 

Adverbial  Sub-connection.  The  analysis  of  the 
replacing  sentence  is  instructive.  Beginners  are 
often  puzzled  by  the  word  "  before."  What  is  it  ? 
The  most  obvious  answer  is  "A  preposition." 
"  Buy  a  new  hat  before  your  return."     "  You 


206         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

come  back,"  or  as  it  is  sometimes  written,  "  that 
you  come  back  "  is  a  noun  sentence.  The  whole 
thing  is  a  noun  sentence  in  an  adverbial  function  ; 
just  as  "In  the  garden  "  is  adverbial  in  "  I  spent 
the  afternoon  in  the  garden,"  or  as  the  Ablative 
is  adverbial  in  "  Vulneratur  telo." 

You  may  feel  inclined  to  call  "  before  "  a  sub- 
ordinate conjunction.  It  is  open  to  you  to  do  so. 
What  you  need  to  recognise  is  that  prepositions 
and  conjunctions  belong  to  the  same  order  of  word 
tools,  viz.  :  the  connectives.  The  preposition, 
(alternatively  with  certain  cases)  is  the  normal 
connector  of  a  noun  in  a  subordinate  function  with 
a  verb  or  otjier  word.  It  is  used  here  perfectly 
naturally  to  connect  a  noun  replacing  sentence 
with  a  verb. 

On  the  other  hand  you  may  say,  Conjunctions 
are  the  normal  connectors  of  sentences.  Here  are 
two  sentences — the  connective  ought  to  be  classed 
as  a  conjunction. 

It  does  not  matter  two  straws  which  method 
you  adopt.  "  Before  "  does  the  work  either  way. 
It  defines  the  relationship  between  the  two  sen- 
tences and  so  connects  them  ;  if  you  regard  the 
second  sentence  as  a  noun,  you  will  call  "  before  "  a 
preposition  ;  if  you  regard  it  as  a  sentence,  you 
will  call  "  before  "  a  conjunction. 

You  must  not  in  any  case  call  '*  before  "  an 
adverb.  It  is  not  an  adverb  but  a  connective 
which  is  quite  a  different  sort  of  word  ;  the  whole 
combination  is  the  adverb. 


CHAPTER    XIII. 

THE    CASES. 

You  were  told  earlier  that  the  Cases  added  to  the  Noun     §1 
not  one  idea  only  but  groups  of  ideas. 

A  rough  analysis  of  the  work  these  Case  tools  did  will 
help  you  in  the  study  of  prepositions  and  also  of  many 
constructions  which  involve  cases. 

Nouns,  apart  from  the  Subject,  come  into  the  sentence 
as  one  or  other  of  the  complementary  ideas  of  the  action. 
"  I  sat  on  the  bridge," 
"  I  talked  to  a  friend," 
"  I  came  from  London  to-day," 
and  so  on. 

Now  the  main  body  of  such  complementary  ideas  which 
had  to  be  expressed  in  the  early  stages  of  language 
were  concrete  ;  they  were  those  dealing  with  place  and 
time — the  whens  and  wheres  of  the  action.  Such  abstract 
ideas  as  : 

M  He  lived  in  a  state  of  savagery," 
would  belong  to  a  later  stage,  whereas,  such  expressions 
as  : 

14  He  lived  in  a  hut," 
would  be  in  everyday  use  quite  early. 

There  are  three  broad  groups  of  such  ideas  : 
The  where  from  of  the  action, 
The  where  of  the  action, 
The  where  to  of  the  action. 
207 


208         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Related  to  them  were  corresponding  time  ideas  : 
The  from  when  of  the  action, 
The  when  of  the  action, 
And  the  to  when  of  the  action. 

To  express  these  three  broad  groups  of  ideas  various 
Case  tools  came  into  use. 

The  where  from  and  when  from  ideas  found  expression 
mainly  in  the  Genitive. 

The  where  and  when  ideas  used  mainly  the  Dative. 

The  where  to  and  when  to  ideas  expressed  themselves 
by  the  Accusative. 

The  original  use  of  all  Cases  was  thus  to  mark  place 
and  time. 

As  language  developed  and  became  more  metaphorical, 
the  Case  tools  were  used  not  only  to  express  the  original 
physical  circumstances  of  the  actions,  but  other  more 
abstract  ones  which  grew  out  of  them,  i.e.,  Cases  were 
not  only  used  to  say  things  like  in  the  garden,  but  also 
such  things  as  in  a  hurry,  secure  in  the  knowledge  that. 

At  a  later  stage  still  the  main  cases  fell  into  disuse 
for  the  physical  work  (their  earliest  work  of  all)  ;  that 
is,  they  ceased,  generally  speaking,  to  say  in  the  garden, 
and  things  like  it,  and  were  left  with  the  vaguer  and 
more  metaphorical  work.  The  physical  work  was  done 
by  prepositions,  and  sometimes  by  other  special  Case 
tools. 

You  can  see  the  process,  not  indeed  by  studying  the 
Cases,  for  the  Cases  themselves  are  gone — at  any  rate 
in  English — but  by  studying  the  Prepositions  which 
they  have  left  behind  them  all  along  their  track. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         209 

THE    GENITIVE    CASE. 

The  following  table  shows  the  general  ideas  which    §2 
ultimately  developed  from  the  original  where  from  idea. 

No  one  Case,  as  such  a  mass  of  related  ideas  developed, 
could  possibly  cope  with  the  work  of  expressing  them 
and  distinguishing  between  them.  Hence  the  develop- 
ment first  of  other  cases,  then  of  prepositions. 

Where  from 

(Subsequent  Ablative). 


Separation.  Partition.  Origin. 

(Subsequent  Ablative)    | 

Material. 


Possession.  Cause. 

Prevailing  Quality. 

I 

Attribute. 

Complement. 

Where  from  (of  place  and  time)  included  such  ideas  as  : 
"  They  went  from  home," 
"  He  jumped  out  of  the  window." 
"  He  started  from  Paris." 
All  this  work  was  subsequently  done  by  the  Ablative. 
You  may  recognise,  generally  speaking,  the  traces  of 
the    Ablative    by  the    occurrence    of  the    preposition 
"  from."  and  those  of  the  Genitive  by  the  occurrence  of 
the  preposition  "  of." 
N 


210         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

From  the  idea  "  Where  from  "    developed  ideas  of : 
i.  Separation. 

2.  Partition. 

3.  Origin. 

1.  Separation  included  such  ideas  as : 

"  Away  from  "    "To  alter  from  "    M  Different  from  " 

"  Far  from  "  "  To  take  from  "  "  Dismissed  from  M 
or  again  : 

"  Bereft  of  "       ''To  rob  a  man  of  " 

'*  To  deprive  of." 

Most  of  this  work  was  subsequently  done  by  the 
Ablative. 

2.  Partition,  included  such  ideas  as  : 

"  He  shall  take  of  mine." 

"  Shall  taste  of  my  dinner." 

"  J'en  ai." 

"  Many  of  us." 

"  A  bottle  of  wine." 
From  it  was  directly  derived  the  idea  of  Material. 

"  We  be  of  one  flesh." 

"  Horns  of  iron." 

"  Made  of  wood." 
From  this  came  the  idea  of  the  pervading  Quality. 

"  The  God  of  all  grace." 

"  A  man  of  intellect." 

"  A  man  of  his  word,"  of  sense,  etc. 
From  this  again  came  the  idea  of  any  Attribute,  and 
so  of  any  Complement  of  a  noun. 

"  A  lover  of  good." 

"  The  architect  of  the  building." 

"  The  housing  of  the  poor." 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         211 

These  are  all  the  object  complements  of  nouns  express- 
ing action. 

3.     Origin  included  such  ideas  as  : 

"  Shakespeare's  works." 

11  Zebedee's  children." 

"  My  brother's  doings." 
From  it  developed  two  other  ideas  : 

(a)  Possession. 

(b)  Cause. 

(a)  Possession  is  shown  in  our  usual  Possessive  Case  : 

"The things  that  are  Caesar's." 

(b)  Cause  is  shown  in  such  expressions  as  : 

"  To  die  of  grief." 

"  The  pangs  of  hunger." 

"  The  thought  of  friends." 

"  Tired  of  work." 

"  The  enjoyment  of  life." 

"  To  be  afraid  of." 

Together  with  dozens  of  French  words  followed 
by  de. 

"  II  riait  de     .     .     .     .  " 

"II  se  fachait  de     .     .     .     .  "  etc. 

The  above  represents  something  of  our  own  past 
dealings  only,  with  the  Genitive  Case.  It  does  not 
follow  that  whenever  we  say  of  Latin  will  use  a  Genitive. 
The  Latin  mind  may  and  sometimes  does  take  some 
other  aspect  of  an  action  and  express  it  by  a  different 
Case.  On  the  other  hand,  the  broad  lines  of  thought 
expressed  by  the  Case  are  the  same  for  all  three 
languages. 


212 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 


THE    DATIVE. 

The  original  idea  is  "  where  "  (in  space  and  time).  The 
general  line  of  development  is  a  good  deal  simpler. 

From  the  idea  of  where  grew  the  idea  of  the  persons 
and  the  things  who  constituted,  as  it  were,  the  circum- 
stances and  accessories  of  the  action.  It  took  place, 
so  to  speak,  in  the  middle  of  them. 

They  fell  into  two  groups  : 

(i).     The  persons  connected  with  it,  and 
(2).     The  things  connected  with  it. 

In  Latin,  the  Ablative,  which  is  only  a  kind  of  second 
Dative,  took  the  work  of  expressing  the  second  group — 
the  things — and  also  the  physical  ideas  of  where  and 
when. 

The  Dative  became  the  special  case  for  the  person 
(other  than  the  Subject  or  direct  Object)  who  was  in 
any  way  connected  with  the  action. 

(1)     Where.    (Subsequent  Ablative). 


(2)  Persons  connected. 

1 

1 

(3)  Things  connected. 
(Subsequent  Ablative) 

"  1 

Indirect  Object. 

Or  any 

1 

and    Adverbial 

Agency. 

interest 

relations  of  the 

Possession. 

in  the 

action  generally 

action, 

e.g.,   price,    in- 

defined 

strument,  cause, 

or  not. 

agency. 

(Subsequent  Ablative) 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE  213 

Different  languages  vary  in  the  use  they  make  of  the 
Dative  (or  the  Dative  replacing  prepositions)  to  express 
(i)  and  (3),  but  they  are  alike  in  using  the  Dative 
as  the  person  case. 


THE    ACCUSATIVE. 

The  Accusative  is  simpler  still.  §4 

Where  to 


Time  (till  when)  Direct  Object. 

Distance  (to  where) 


Measurements. 


Just  as  there  were  only  Present,  Past  and  Future 
groups    of    Tenses,    so    there    were    only    originally  : 
Where  from,    Where,    Where  to  Cases. 

Other  Cases  are  developments  of  these. 

Study  the  Ablative.  Note  its  relation  to  the  Genitive 
and  Dative.  Note  its  main  idea — the  thing  acces- 
sories of  the  action,  and  how  the  Genitive  ideas,  which 
have  been  absorbed,  can  be  regarded  in  this  light. 

"  He  dismissed  him  from  his  office," 
may  be  regarded  as  an  instance  of  separation — originally 
a  Genitive  idea.     "  Office  "  may  also  be  regarded  as  one 


214         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

of  the  thing  accessories  of  dismissed  ;  and  so  come  to  be 
finally  an  Ablative  idea. 

Again,    the   idea   of   cause   may  be  associated  with 
the  idea  of  origin;  and  so  of  "  where  from  " 
Taedet  me  vitae. 

Or  it  can  be  regarded  as  one  of  the  thing  accessories 
of  the  action  and  expressed  by  an  Ablative. 

Ablatives,  broadly  speaking,  make  Nouns  into 
Adverb  Phrases,  but  not  into  Adjective  ones. 

For  an  analysis  of  Case  to  be  of  any  use  to  you,  you 
must  have  in  front  of  you  as  you  study  it,  examples 
of  the  Cases  at  work.  Your  Latin  reading  book  will  be 
the  readiest  source  of  such.  For  example,  to  study  the 
Dative,  proceed  thus  : 

Take  a  couple  of  pages  of  familiar  Latin.  Collect  all 
the  Datives.  Write  down  the  particular  idea  each  one 
conveys  :  and  place  it  in  the  subdivision  of  the  general 
Dative  idea,  to  which  it  belongs. 

You  cannot  get  the  sense  of  the  Dative  from  having 
the  Dative  described  to  you.  You  can  only  get  it  by 
observing  Datives.  Use  the  foregoing  analysis  there- 
fore to  guide  your  observations,  not  to  replace  them. 


CHAPTER    XIV. 

Speech  is  sometimes  reported  indirectly,  or  as  it  is 
called  obliquely. 

Instead  of  the  speaker's  exact  words  being  given,  e.g.,  JJ™ti0 
He  said  "  /  have  done  it,"  the  substance  may  be  given, 
e.g.,  "  He  said  he  had  done  it." 

The  practical  effect  is  to  destroy  the  independent 
existence  which  the  sentence  had  when  its  exact  words 
were  quoted,  and  to  turn  it  into  the  object  of  some  such 
word  as  "  He  says,"  "  He  said,"  "  He  asked,"  "  He 
commanded,"  all  of  which  verbs  are  verbs  of  mentality. 

The  usual  principles  apply.     The  cases  arising  are  : 

i.  Statements.  "  He  said  he  had  done  it,"  the 
object  is  the  figure  of  an  action ;  Infinitive  or 
Subjunctive  ;    the  Infinitive  is  Latin  practice. 

2.  Commands.  "  Make  haste.  Get  your  weapons 
ready,"  becomes  "  He  commanded  them  to  make 
haste  ;  to  get  their  weapons  ready."  The  objects 
are  Figures  of  Actions.  The  Subjunctive  or 
the  Infinitive  needed.  The  Subjunctive  is  Latin 
practice. 

3.  Questions.    A  question  addressed  to  one  person 

about  another  person  or  thing  approximates  to 
a  statement.  "  I  ask  you,  am  I  to  wait  all  day," 
is  practically  equivalent  to,  "  I  am  to  wait  all 
day  I  suppose."  Such  questions  are  treated  as 
statements.  "  Is  the  building  finished  yet." 
He  supposed  the  building  was  finished.  Was 
it  so  ?  The  Accusative  with  the  Infinitive  de- 
215 


2l6         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

notes  the  thought  of  the  action.  A  special  word 
adds  the  idea  of  the  question. 

When,  however,  the  question  concerns  the 
person  it  is  addressed  to,  this  person  matters 
much  more  to  the  general  sense. 

"  I  ask  you,  am  I  to  wait  all  day,"  "  You  "  is 
unimportant ;  it  might  just  as  well  have  been 
14  I  ask  these  gentlemen,  am  I  ....  " 

But  in  "  I  ask  you  if  you  will  do  it,"  44  You  " 
is  a  word  of  quite  different  weight. 

Hence  in  such  questions  the  full  Subjunctive 
Sentence  is  adopted  to  express  the  thought  of 
the  action.  "  Are  you  going  ? "  "I  asked 
whether  he  were  going." 

The  Tenses  depend  entirely  on  the  Tense  of  the  re- 
port.    If  the  report  is  present — He  says  or  asks  so  and 

so ,  the  figures  of  the  following   Subjunctives  will 

all  be  present  figures — and  the  Tenses  Present  or  Perfect 
Subjunctives. 

If  the  report  is  past. — He  said  so  and  so — the  figures 
following  will  be  past  figures,  and  the  Tenses  Imperfects 
or  Pluperfects. 


The  Indicatives  of  replacing  sentences  are  affected 
also.  "  The  fireman,  who  rescued  the  child,  was  unhurt," 
becomes  when  reported — The  newspaper  asserted,  that 
the  fireman,  who,  it  ivas  informed,  had  rescued  the  child, 
was  unhurt.  The  rescue  is  no  longer  recorded, 
but  thought  about.  The  Subjunctive  replaces  the 
Indicative. 


THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE         217 

An  Indicative  appearing  in  reported  speech  denotes 
that  the  fact  expressed  is  not  part  of  that  body  of  state- 
ment for  which  the  speaker  makes  himself  responsible. 

A  few  definitions  are  collected  for  convenience  of 
reference  : 

A  Noun  is  the  name  of  anybody  or  anything ;  and 
an  Adjective  adds  supplementary  information  about 
this  person  or  thing.  This  information  is  usually  of 
secondary  importance,  but  need  not  be  so. 

A  Verb  is  the  word  or  set  of  words  which  describe  the 
state  or  the  action  which  constitutes  the  central  idea 
of  every  sentence.  An  Adverb  adds  supplementary 
information  about  this  state  or  action.  This  information 
is  usually  of  secondary  importance,  but  need  not  be  so. 

A  Pronoun  is  a  short  substitute  for  a  noun,  used 
when  the  actual  mention  or  repetition  of  the  noun  is 
unnecessary  for  the  sense.  Shortness  is  an  essential 
characteristic  of  it.  Its  work  is  precisely  that  of 
the  noun. 

To  make  sense  these  words  have  to  be  connected,  i.e., 
their  relationships  have  to  be  defined. 

The  connectives  are  as  follows : 

Proximity  which  denotes  a  relationship  without 
defining  it. 

Case  Inflections,  Number  and  Person  Inflections, 
Order  and  Prepositions,  all  of  which  define  the  internal 
relationships  of  the  words  in  a  sentence. 

Conjunctions,  Tense  Inflections,  and  Mood  Inflections 
define  the  external  relationships  of  the  sentence,  i.e., 
not  the  relationships  between  the  component  parts  of 
the  sentence,  but  those  of  the  whole  sentence  to  other 
sentences  or  ideas,  expressed  or  implied. 


21 8         THE  ELEMENTS  OF  LANGUAGE 

Inflection  is  a  change  in  or  addition  to  the  stem  of  a 
word,  which  adds  a  further  idea  to  the  original  idea  of 
the  word. 

The  different  Case  Inflections  in  Latin  define  the 
different  relationships  of  the  noun  to  other  words  in 
the  sentence.  Those  of  the  Adjective  define  the  re- 
lation of  the  Adjective  to  the  Noun. 

Order  in  English  expresses  the  relation  of  the  Subject 
and  the  Objects  with  the  Verb,  i.e.,  it  defines  the  in- 
dependent or  semi-independent  relationships  of  the 
noun.  The  Nominative,  Accusative,  and  Dative  Cases 
in  Latin  do  similar  work.  Order  also  connects  the 
Adjective  with  the  Noun,  and  the  Adverb  with  the  Verb. 
Prepositions  in  English  define  the  subordinate  re- 
lationships of  the  Noun  to  other  words  in  the  sentence. 
The  Person  and  Number  Inflections  define  the  relation- 
ship of  the  Verb  to  the  Subject. 

A  Replacing  Sentence  is  a  sentence  which  replaces  any 
part  of  speech.  It  is  not  necessarily  subordinate.  Its 
character  is  exactly  that  of  the  word  it  replaces. 

Equi-connection  and  Sub-connection  are  relationships 
between  two  sentences.     Equi-connection  is  a  relation 
implying  mutual  independence.     Sub-connection  implies 
the  absorption  of  one  sentence  by  the  other. 
"  There  was  a  young  lady  of  Riga 
Who  went  for  a  ride  on  a  tiger." 
So  far,  Equi-connection. 
"  They  returned  from  the  ride, 
With  the  lady  inside, 
And  a  smile  on  the  face  of  the  tiger." 
Absorption  and  Sub-connection. 


RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TO—*-     202  Main  Library 


LOAN  PERIOD  1 
HOME  USE 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

RENEWALS  AND  RECHARGES  MAY  BE  MADE  4  DAYS  PRIOR  TO  DUE  DATE. 
LOAN  PERIODS  ARE  1-MONTH.  3-MONTHS.  AND  1-YEAR. 
RENEWALS:  CALL  (415)  642-3405 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 


INTERLI6RAKV 


LOAN 


JUL  ?.  4  1990 


W1V.  Of  CALIF,, 


BgRK, 


crM->AA    K\r\     r\r\t. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 

/oo  ocni/ci  trv    r-  a   nnnn 


CI  1^275 
1 


**' 


%**